703624
4
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/174
Pagina verder
COMAND
Supplement
Mercedes-Benz
Order no. P205 0946 13 Part no. 205 584 83 12 Edition A-2018
É2055848312]ËÍ
2055848312
COMAND Supplement
Publication details
Internet
Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehi-
cles and about Daimler AG can be found on the
following websites:
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)
http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only)
Editorial office
You are welcome to forward any queries or sug-
gestions you may have regarding this Operator's
Manual to the technical documentation team at
the following address:
Daimler AG, HPC: CAC, Customer Service,
70546 Stuttgart, Germany
Daimler AG: Not to be reprinted, translated or
otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, with-
out written permission from Daimler AG.
Vehicle manufacturer
Daimler AG
Mercedesstrae 137
70327 Stuttgart
Germany
Symbols
In this Operator's Manual you will find the fol-
lowing symbols:
G
WARNING
Warning notes make you aware of dangers
which could pose a threat to your health or
life, or to the health and life of others.
Environmental note
Environmental notes provide you with infor-
mation on environmentally aware actions or
disposal.
!
Notes on material damage alert you to dan-
gers that could lead to damage to your vehi-
cle.
i
Practical tips or further information that
could be helpful to you.
X
This symbol indicates an instruction
that must be followed.
X
Several of these symbols in succession
indicate an instruction with several
steps.
(Y
page)
This symbol tells you where you can find
more information about a topic.
Dis‐
play
This text indicates a message in the
multimedia display.
Parts of the software in the vehicle are protected
by copyright
2005 The FreeType Project
http://www.freetype.org. All rights reserved.
As at 03.11.2016
Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz
First of all, familiarize yourself with your multi-
media system. Read these operating instruc-
tions, particularly the safety and warning notes,
before you drive off.
This will help you to obtain the maximum pleas-
ure from your multimedia system and avoid
endangering yourself and others.
The equipment level and functions of your mul-
timedia system may differ depending on:
R
Model
R
Order
R
Country specification
R
Availability
Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to
introduce changes in the following areas:
R
Design
R
Equipment
R
Technical features
The equipment in your vehicle may therefore
differ from that shown in the descriptions and
illustrations.
Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center if
you have further questions.
The Operator's Manual and all supplements are
integral parts of the vehicle. You should always
keep it in the vehicle and pass it on to the new
owner if you sell the vehicle.
The technical documentation team at
Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant motor-
ing.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
A Daimler Company
2055848312
É2055848312]ËÍ
Index ....................................................... 4
Introduction ......................................... 15
Operating safety .................................... 15
Data stored in the vehicle ...................... 16
Information on copyright .......................18
Your multimedia system equipment ...... 18
Overview and operation ..................... 19
Overview ................................................ 19
Touchpad ...............................................23
Basic functions ...................................... 28
Character entry (telephony) ................... 30
Character entry (navigation) .................. 31
Favorites ................................................ 33
System settings .................................. 35
Your multimedia system equipment ...... 35
Important safety notes .......................... 35
Display settings ..................................... 35
Time settings .........................................36
Text reader settings ...............................37
Voice Control System settings ............... 38
Wi-Fi ...................................................... 38
Bluetooth
®
settings ............................... 40
Automatic volume adjustment ............... 40
Setting the system language .................40
Calling up and editing the Favorites
function .................................................41
Importing/exporting data ...................... 41
Reset function ....................................... 43
Vehicle functions ................................ 44
Your multimedia system equipment ...... 44
Important safety notes .......................... 44
Vehicle settings .....................................44
360° camera ......................................... 46
Rear view camera .................................. 47
Climate control settings ........................ 48
DYNAMIC SELECT .................................. 50
Navigation ........................................... 53
Your multimedia system equipment ...... 53
Introduction ...........................................53
Basic settings ........................................ 55
Destination entry ................................... 57
Personal POIs and routes ...................... 67
Route guidance ...................................... 71
Real-time traffic reports ......................... 77
Storing destinations ............................... 80
Map functions ........................................ 82
Functions in the Navigation menu ......... 87
Problems with the navigation system .... 88
Telephone ............................................ 91
Your multimedia system equipment ...... 91
Important safety notes .......................... 91
General notes ........................................ 91
Telephone menu .................................... 92
Connecting/disconnecting a mobile
phone .................................................... 92
Reception and transmission volume ...... 96
Using the telephone .............................. 97
Mobile phone voice recognition ........... 100
Phone book ......................................... 101
Address book ...................................... 104
Call lists ............................................... 110
Speed dial lists .................................... 112
Messages ............................................ 113
Online and Internet functions .......... 120
Your multimedia system equipment .... 120
Important safety notes ........................ 120
General notes ...................................... 120
Conditions for access .......................... 120
Setting up an Internet connection
(Canada) .............................................. 121
Establishing/ending the connection .... 124
Mercedes-Benz Apps ........................... 124
Door-to-door navigation ....................... 125
Web browser .......................................125
Radio .................................................. 130
Your multimedia system equipment .... 130
Switching on the radio ......................... 130
Overview .............................................. 130
Setting the waveband .......................... 130
Station ................................................. 131
Tagging music tracks ........................... 132
Displaying station information ............. 133
2
Contents
Calling up sound settings .................... 133
Displaying information .........................133
Satellite radio ...................................... 133
Media ................................................. 138
Your multimedia system equipment .... 138
Activating media mode ........................ 138
Audio/video mode ............................... 139
Media search ....................................... 144
Media Register ....................................145
Bluetooth
®
audio mode ....................... 148
Operation with the Media Interface ..... 152
Video DVD mode ................................. 154
Picture viewer ...................................... 158
Sound ................................................. 160
Your multimedia system equipment .... 160
Sound settings ..................................... 160
Burmester
®
surround sound system .... 160
SIRIUS Weather ................................ 162
Your multimedia system equipment .... 162
Weather forecasts ............................... 162
Contents
3
1, 2, 3 ...
360° camera
Displaying images ............................ 46
Opening the camera cover for
cleaning (COMAND) .........................47
Settings ........................................... 47
Switching on/off .............................. 46
A
Access data of the mobile phone
network provider
Deleting ......................................... 123
Editing ........................................... 123
Making entries ............................... 122
Selecting ........................................ 121
Acoustic locking confirmation
Activating/deactivating
(COMAND) ....................................... 45
Activating media mode
General notes ................................ 138
Switching on automatically ............ 139
Adding bookmarks ............................ 126
Address
Entering (navigation) ........................ 57
Address book
Adding a new contact .................... 105
Adding information to a contact .... 106
Automatically importing contacts
from the phone .............................. 108
Browsing ........................................ 104
Calling up ....................................... 104
Changing the category of an entry .. 107
Changing the display and sorting
criteria for contacts ....................... 108
Deleting contacts ........................... 108
Deleting imported contacts ........... 110
Displaying contact details .............. 105
Editing a contact ............................ 107
Entering characters ......................... 30
Importing contacts ........................ 109
Introduction ................................... 104
Making a call ................................. 106
Receiving vCards ........................... 109
Saving a contact ............................ 108
Searching for a contact ................. 104
Sending e-mails ............................. 106
Sending text messages .................. 106
Starting route guidance ................. 106
Storing a phone number as a
speed dial number ......................... 107
Voice tags ...................................... 107
Address entry menu
Navigation ........................................ 57
Adjusting the volume
COMAND ......................................... 28
Media source ................................... 28
Traffic announcements .................... 28
Alternative Route ................................ 75
Ambient lighting
Setting (COMAND) ........................... 44
Asterisk key
see Favorites button
Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode
Bluetooth
®
audio mode ................. 148
Connecting USB devices ................ 142
Data media, file sy
stems, formats .. 139
Gracenote
®
Media Database ......... 143
Inserting/removing a CD/DVD
(single drive) .................................. 141
Media interface .............................. 152
Media Register ............................... 145
Media search ................................. 144
Playback options ........................... 142
SD card .......................................... 141
Search menu ................................. 143
Selecting a track ............................ 143
Sound settings ............................... 160
Stop and playback function ........... 143
Audio mode
Menu overview .............................. 141
Automatic folding mirror function
Activating/deactivating
(COMAND) ....................................... 45
Automatic locking feature
Activating/deactivating
(COMAND) ....................................... 45
Automatic time
Switching on/off .............................. 36
Automatic volume adjustment
General information ......................... 40
Switching on/off .............................. 40
Avoiding an area .................................. 85
4
Index
B
Back button ......................................... 21
Bluetooth
®
Activating audio mode ................... 149
Activating/deactivating ................... 40
Audio device mode and searching
for mobile phones .......................... 152
Bluetooth
®
audio menu ................. 149
Connecting a different mobile
phone .............................................. 96
Connecting audio devices .............. 149
De-authorizing (de-registering) a
device ............................................ 152
Device list ...................................... 149
Displaying connection details .......... 96
Displaying details ........................... 150
Entering the passcode ..................... 94
External authorization (audio
device) ........................................... 150
General information ......................... 40
Increasing the volume using
COMAND ....................................... 151
Interface .......................................... 91
Introduction ..................................... 91
Playback options ........................... 151
Preparation .................................... 148
Reconnecting an audio device ....... 152
Searching for a mobile phone .......... 94
Selecting a playback option ........... 151
Selecting a track ............................ 151
Starting and stopping playback ..... 150
Starting playback if the Blue-
tooth
®
audio device has been
stopped ......................................... 151
Telephony ........................................ 92
Telephony notes .............................. 91
Burmester
®
surround sound sys-
tem
Balance/fader ............................... 161
Calling up the sound menu ............ 160
Equalizer ........................................ 161
Equipment ..................................... 160
Surround sound ............................. 161
Buttons and controller ........................ 21
C
Call lists
Displaying details ........................... 110
Opening and selecting an entry ..... 110
Saving an entry in the address
book .............................................. 111
Calling up the compass display ......... 87
Car pool lanes ...................................... 56
Category list (music search) ............ 144
CD
Inserting ........................................ 141
Notes on discs ............................... 140
Characters
Entering (navigation) ........................ 31
Climate control
Calling up climate control
(COMAND) ....................................... 49
Calling up the climate control bar
(COMAND) ....................................... 48
COMAND ......................................... 48
Cooling with air dehumidification
(COMAND) ....................................... 50
Ionization (COMAND) ....................... 49
Overview .......................................... 48
Perfume atomizer (COMAND) .......... 49
Pre-entry climate control
(COMAND) ....................................... 49
Pre-entry climate control at
departure time (COMAND) ............... 49
Pre-entry climate control using
the key (COMAND) .......................... 49
Setting the air distribution
(COMAND) ....................................... 48
Setting the airflow (COMAND) ......... 48
Setting the climate mode
(COMAND) ....................................... 49
Setting the temperature
(COMAND) ....................................... 48
Switching ionization on/off
(COMAND) ....................................... 49
Switching on/off (COMAND) ........... 50
Climate control bar
Calling up ......................................... 48
COMAND
Basic display menu .......................... 29
Basic functions ................................ 28
Components .................................... 19
Index
5
Controller .........................................21
Display ............................................. 20
Selecting operating mode ................ 29
Settings ......................................... 127
Switching on/off .............................. 28
COMAND display
Cleaning instructions ....................... 20
Setting ............................................. 35
Contacts
Deleting ......................................... 108
Importing ....................................... 109
Controller ............................................. 22
Copying music files
see Media Register
Copying/renaming/deleting files
see Media Register
D
Date format, setting ............................ 37
Day design, setting ............................. 35
Delayed switch-off time
Setting (COMAND) ........................... 46
Deleting
Call lists ......................................... 112
Destination (navigation)
Editing a previous destination .......... 81
Entering a destination by address .... 57
Entering a destination using the
map .................................................64
Entering a point of interest .............. 61
Entering using geo-coordinates ....... 67
Entering using Mercedes-Benz
Apps ................................................ 66
General notes .................................. 57
Keyword search ............................... 59
Personal POIs and routes ................. 67
Saving .............................................. 80
Saving to the SD card. ..................... 81
Selecting an address book con-
tact as a destination ........................ 61
Selecting from the list of last des-
tinations ........................................... 61
Storing in the address book. ............ 80
Dialing a number (telephone) ............. 97
Display
Selecting the design ........................ 35
Switching on/off .............................. 36
Display COMAND
see COMAND display
Displaying current position (navi-
gation) .................................................. 76
Displaying the artist and track
Radio ............................................. 133
Distance
see Route (navigation)
DVD
Notes on discs ............................... 140
see Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode
DVD video
Operating DVD functions ............... 158
Showing/hiding DVD functions ..... 157
DYNAMIC SELECT
Configuration via the DYNAMIC
SELECT switch ................................. 51
Configuring individual drive pro-
gram ................................................ 50
Displaying engine data ..................... 51
Displaying vehicle data .................... 51
Setting options
................................ 51
E
E-mail
Answering ...................................... 117
Calling up the settings menu ......... 113
Changing the name of the e-mail
account .......................................... 114
Configuring an e-mail account ....... 114
Configuring the e-mails displayed .. 114
Deactivating the e-mail function .... 114
Deleting ......................................... 119
Displaying details ........................... 115
Downloading e-mails manually ...... 114
Editing text templates .................... 117
Forwarding ..................................... 117
Inbox .............................................. 115
Reading .......................................... 114
Saving the sender in the address
book .............................................. 119
Settings ......................................... 113
Storing the sender as a new entry
in the address book ....................... 118
Unread messages .......................... 114
Using a phone number in the text .. 118
Using text templates ...................... 117
6
Index
Writing ...........................................116
EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature
Activating/deactivating
(COMAND) ....................................... 45
Entering the city .................................. 57
Exterior mirror
Activating/deactivating the auto-
matic folding mirror function
(COMAND) ....................................... 45
F
Factory setting (reset function) ......... 43
Favorites
Adding ............................................. 33
Adding (predefined) ......................... 33
Adding (your own) ............................ 33
Deleting ...........................................34
Displaying and calling up ................. 33
Moving ............................................. 33
Overview .......................................... 33
Renaming ......................................... 33
Favorites (Internet) ........................... 128
Favorites button .................................. 41
G
GPS reception ...................................... 53
Gracenote
®
Media Database ............ 143
H
Handwriting recognition
Switching text reader function
on/off .............................................. 26
Touchpad ......................................... 26
Heading up (navigation) ..................... 82
Home
see Home address
Home address
Entering and saving .........................58
I
Importing/exporting data .................. 41
Incident (traffic report) .......................77
Interior lighting
Setting the delayed switch-off
time (COMAND) ...............................46
Intermediate destinations
Entering ........................................... 64
Internet
Conditions for access .................... 120
Creating favorites .......................... 128
Entering the URL ............................ 125
Favorites manager ......................... 128
Favorites menu .............................. 128
Menu functions .............................. 126
Options menu ................................ 126
Selecting/setting access data ....... 121
Setting automatic disconnection
of the Internet connection ............. 123
Setting up an Internet connection .. 121
K
Keyword search (navigation)
Entering keywords ........................... 59
Online search ................................... 61
Selecting search options ................. 60
Selecting search results ................... 60
L
Lane recommendations
Explanation ...................................... 72
Presentation .................................... 72
Lighting
Setting the delayed switch-off
time (COMAND) ............................... 46
Switching the locator lighting on/
off .................................................... 45
Lights
Setting the ambient lighting
(COMAND) ....................................... 44
List of access data
New provider ................................. 122
List of mobile phone network pro-
viders
With the selected provider ............. 122
Locator lighting
Setting (COMAND) ........................... 45
Locking confirmation
see Acoustic locking confirmation
Index
7
M
Making a call
Using speed dial .............................. 98
Using the call lists ............................ 98
Using the phone book ...................... 98
Map (navigation)
3D map ............................................ 82
Adjusting the scale ..........................82
Building images ................................ 84
Displaying the next intersection ...... 83
Elevation modeling ........................... 84
Map heading up ............................... 82
Map settings .................................... 82
Moving ............................................. 54
North orientation ............................. 82
Notes ............................................... 82
Rotating the 3D map ........................ 84
Selecting POI symbols on the
map ................................................. 83
Selecting text information on the
map ................................................. 83
Showing the map version ................. 84
Switching highway information
on/off .............................................. 83
Updating .......................................... 86
Map functions ...................................... 82
Media Interface
Media Interface menu .................... 153
Playback options ........................... 154
Search ........................................... 153
Selecting a music file ..................... 153
Supported devices ......................... 153
Supported file formats ................... 153
Switching to Media Interface ......... 153
Video function ............................... 154
Media mode
Bluetooth
®
Audio ........................... 148
Connections for external media
sources .......................................... 138
Media search ................................. 144
Switching on .................................. 138
Media Register
Calling up memory space informa-
tion ................................................ 147
Copying files .................................. 146
Deleting all files ............................. 147
Media Register menu ..................... 146
Renaming/deleting files ................ 147
Selecting a playback mode ............ 147
Switching on .................................. 145
Media search
By folder ........................................ 144
Category list .................................. 144
Current track list ............................ 144
General notes ................................ 144
Keyword search ............................. 145
Music genres ................................. 145
Selecting by
cover ......................... 145
Sta
rting the media search .............. 144
Mercedes-Benz Apps
Calling up ....................................... 124
Mercedes-Benz Companion
Door-to-door navigation ................. 125
Microphone, switching on/off ........... 99
Mobile phone
Authorizing ....................................... 94
Connecting (Bluetooth
®
inter-
face) ................................................ 92
Connecting another mobile
phone .............................................. 96
De-authorizing ................................. 96
Displaying Bluetooth
®
connection
details .............................................. 96
Enabling for Internet access .......... 121
Monitor
see COMAND display
MP3
Copyright ....................................... 140
Stop and playback function ........... 143
see Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode
Multimedia system
see Display
Music
see Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode
MUSIC REGISTER
General notes ................................ 145
My address
Saving .............................................. 58
N
Navigation
Adjusting the volume of the navi-
gation announcements .................... 28
Alternative route .............................. 75
8
Index
Avoiding an area .............................. 85
Basic settings .................................. 55
Blocking a route section affected
by a traffic jam ................................. 76
Calling up the compass display ........ 87
Calling up the menu ......................... 87
Canceling/continuing route guid-
ance ................................................. 74
Displaying current position .............. 76
Drive Information ............................. 87
Entering a destination ...................... 57
Entering a destination using geo-
coordinates ...................................... 67
Entering a destination using
Mercedes-Benz Apps ....................... 66
Entering a destination using the
map ................................................. 64
Entering a point of interest .............. 61
Entering characters (character
bar) .................................................. 31
Entering intermediate destina-
tions ................................................. 64
Entry restriction ............................... 53
First use ........................................... 53
General notes .................................. 53
GPS reception .................................. 53
Important safety notes .................... 53
Info on navigation ............................ 88
Lane recommendation ..................... 72
Map functions .................................. 82
Moving the map ............................... 54
Off-road/Off-map (off-road desti-
nation) ............................................. 76
Online map display .......................... 87
Personal POIs and routes ................. 67
Problems ......................................... 88
Reading out traffic reports ............... 79
Repeating announcements .............. 74
Route flight ...................................... 88
Route information ............................ 75
Saving destinations .......................... 80
Saving home address ....................... 58
Selecting a destination from the
list of last destinations ..................... 61
Setting route options (avoiding:
highways, toll roads, tunnels, fer-
ries) ................................................. 55
Setting the announcements vol-
ume ................................................. 74
Setting the route type (short
route, fast route, dynamic route or
economic route) ............................... 55
Showing
/hiding the me
nu ............... 54
Starting route calculation ................ 59
Switching announcements
on/off .............................................. 74
Switching to ..................................... 54
Traffic jam function .......................... 76
Updating the digital map .................. 86
Navigation announcements
Switching off .................................... 29
North orientation (navigation) ........... 82
O
Off-road ................................................ 76
Online and Internet functions
Calling up ....................................... 124
Calling up the device list ................ 123
Enabling a mobile phone for Inter-
net access ..................................... 121
Ending the connection ................... 124
Establishing a connection .............. 124
Managing all Internet devices ........ 123
Manually setting the access data
of the mobile phone network pro-
vider .............................................. 122
Mercedes-Benz Apps ..................... 124
Selecting the access data of the
mobile phone network provider ..... 121
Setting automatic disconnection
of the Internet connection ............. 123
Setting up an Internet connection .. 121
Web browser .................................. 125
Own address (navigation)
see Home address
P
Pause function
Video DVD ..................................... 158
Perfume atomizer
Setting the perfume intensity
(COMAND) ....................................... 49
Index
9
Personal POIs and routes
Alert when approaching (personal
POI) .................................................. 68
Editing ..............................................69
General notes .................................. 67
Importing via Mercedes-Benz
Apps ................................................ 69
Recording the route .........................70
Saving .............................................. 68
Selecting .......................................... 69
Selecting and editing ....................... 69
Settings for personal POIs ............... 67
Phone book
Adding a new contact .................... 102
Adding information to a contact .... 102
Calling up ....................................... 101
Deleting a contact ......................... 103
Displaying the details of an entry ... 102
Entering characters ......................... 30
Saving a contact ............................ 103
Searching for a contact ................. 101
Symbol overview ............................ 101
Phone call
Dialing .............................................. 97
Picture viewer
Changing view ............................... 159
Displaying pictures ........................ 158
Exiting the picture viewer .............. 159
General notes ................................ 158
Starting a slide show ..................... 159
PIN protection
Activating/deactivating ................... 42
POI (navigation)
Calling up the menu ......................... 61
Category .......................................... 62
Defining the position for the POI
search .............................................. 62
Entering ........................................... 61
Rotating 3D POI ............................... 64
Selecting .......................................... 63
Previous destinations (navigation) .... 81
R
Radio
Activating/deactivating the sta-
tion presets display ....................... 132
Deleting a station .......................... 132
Displaying information ................... 133
Displaying station information ....... 133
Displaying the artist and track ....... 133
Moving stations ............................. 132
Overview ........................................ 130
Setting the waveband .................... 130
Sound settings (balance, bass,
treble) ............................................ 133
Station list ..................................... 132
Storing stations ............................. 132
Switching on .................................. 130
Tagging music tracks (download-
ing/purchasing tracks from the
iTunes Store
®
) ............................... 132
Radio station
Storing ........................................... 132
Read-aloud function
Automatic ........................................ 80
Read-aloud function for e-mails ....... 115
Reading out
Traffic reports on the route .............. 79
Real-time traffic reports ..................... 77
Rear view camera
Displaying the image ........................ 47
Object detection .............................. 47
Opening the camera cover for
cleaning (COMAND) ......................... 48
Switching object detection
on/off .............................................. 47
Switching on/off (COMAND) ........... 47
Receiving vCards ............................... 109
Redialing (telephone) .......................... 98
Reducing the volume
Switching announcements on/off
(COMAND) ....................................... 56
Reserve fuel level
Switching announcements on/off
(COMAND) ....................................... 56
Resetting (factory settings) ............... 43
Road map
see Map (navigation)
Route (navigation)
Selecting an alternative route .......... 75
Setting route options (avoiding:
highways, toll roads, tunnels, fer-
ries) ................................................. 55
10
Index
Setting the route type (short
route, fast route, dynamic route or
economic route) ............................... 55
Starting calculation .......................... 59
Route guidance
Canceling/continuing ...................... 74
Continue .......................................... 74
Freeway information ........................ 73
General notes .................................. 71
Lane recommendations ................... 72
Off-road ........................................... 76
Traffic reports .................................. 77
S
Safety notes
Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode ..... 139
Using the telephone ......................... 91
Satellite radio
Displaying information ................... 137
Overview ........................................ 134
Presets menu view ......................... 135
Registering .................................... 134
Switching to ................................... 134
SatRadio
Channel list updates ...................... 137
Memory functions .......................... 135
Music and sports alerts ................. 136
Notes ............................................. 133
Selecting a category ...................... 134
Selecting a channel ....................... 135
Tagging music tracks ..................... 136
SD card
Inserting ........................................ 141
Inserting/removing ........................ 141
Removing ....................................... 141
Searching for a gas station
When the fuel level is low ................ 66
Seat-belt adjustment function
Activating/deactivating
(COMAND) ....................................... 45
Selecting stations
Radio ............................................. 131
Sending DTMF tones ........................... 99
Setting access data
Online and Internet ........................ 121
Setting the language
COMAND ......................................... 41
Setting the night design ..................... 35
Setting the text reader speed ............ 37
Setting the volume
Telephone calls ................................ 28
Short message
see Text messages (SMS)
SIRIUS weather display
5-day forecast ................................ 162
Daily forecast ................................. 162
Detail information .......................... 163
Information chart ........................... 162
Selecting a location for the
weather forecast ............................ 163
Switching on/off ........................... 162
Weather map ................................. 165
SMS
Unread messages .......................... 114
Sound
Switching on/off .............................. 28
Sound settings
Audio ............................................. 160
Balance/fader ............................... 160
Calling up the sound menu ............ 160
Equalizer ........................................ 160
Sound system
see Burmester
®
surround sound system
Speed dial
Deleting ......................................... 112
Setting up ...................................... 112
State/province
Selecting
.......................................... 58
Stati
on presets (radio)
Deleting marked stations ............... 132
Stop function
Video DVD ..................................... 158
Storing stations
Radio ............................................. 132
Street name announcements
Switching on/off (COMAND) ........... 56
Switching between summer time
and standard time ............................... 36
Switching on media mode
Using the Media button ................. 138
Via the device list .......................... 139
Via the main function bar ............... 138
System settings
Automatic volume adjustment ......... 40
Index
11
Bluetooth
®
....................................... 40
Date ................................................. 36
Importing/exporting data ................ 41
Language .........................................40
Text reader speed ............................37
Time .................................................36
Time zone ........................................36
Voice Control System ...................... 38
T
Telephone
Accepting a call (COMAND) .............97
Adding a call .................................... 98
Adjusting the volume for calls .......... 28
Authorizing a mobile phone (con-
necting) ............................................ 94
Call lists ......................................... 110
Call waiting .................................... 100
Calling up the telephone menu ........ 92
Calls with several participants ......... 99
Conference calls ............................ 100
Connecting a mobile phone (gen-
eral information) .............................. 92
De-authorizing (disconnecting) a
mobile phone ................................... 96
Deleting a speed dial preset .......... 112
Deleting messages ........................ 119
Displaying Bluetooth
®
connection
details .............................................. 96
Downloading messages manually .. 114
E-mail ............................................. 113
E-mail requirements ....................... 113
E-mail settings ............................... 113
Ending an active call ...................... 100
Entering a number ........................... 97
Entering phone numbers .................. 97
Establishing the connection from
the mobile phone ............................. 95
Function restrictions ........................ 92
Functions available during a call ...... 98
General notes .................................. 91
Incoming call during an existing
call ................................................. 100
Making a call .................................... 97
Message conditions ....................... 113
Message settings ........................... 113
Operating options ............................ 92
Phone book .................................... 101
Reading messages ......................... 114
Reception and transmission vol-
ume ................................................. 96
Reconnecting a mobile phone
automatically ................................... 96
Rejecting a call (COMAND) .............. 97
Safety notes ..................................... 91
Sending DTMF tones ........................ 99
Setting up a speed dial .................. 112
Switching between calls (call wait-
ing
) .................................................. 99
Sw
itching between mobile
phones ............................................. 96
Switching the microphone on/off .... 99
Telephone menu overview ............... 92
Text message conditions ............... 113
Text message settings ................... 113
Text messages (SMS) .................... 113
Toggling ........................................... 99
Using the telephone ......................... 97
Voice recognition ........................... 100
Writing e-mails ............................... 116
Writing text messages ................... 116
Telephone number
Entering ........................................... 97
Text messages (SMS)
Calling the sender .......................... 118
Calling up the settings menu ......... 113
Configuring the text messages
displayed ....................................... 113
Deleting ......................................... 119
Displaying details ........................... 115
Downloading manually ................... 114
Editing text templates .................... 117
Inbox .............................................. 115
Reading .......................................... 114
Reading aloud ................................ 115
Settings ......................................... 113
Storing sender in address book ..... 118
Storing the sender as a new
address book entry ........................ 118
Using a phone number in the text .. 118
Using text templates ...................... 117
Writing ........................................... 116
Time
Setting ............................................. 37
Setting summer/standard time ....... 36
12
Index
Setting the format ............................ 37
Setting the time ............................... 37
Setting the time zone ....................... 36
Setting the time/date format .......... 37
Switching automatic time on/off ..... 36
Touchpad
Calling up quick access for audio .... 24
Changing the input language for
handwriting recognition ................... 27
Changing the station/music
track ................................................ 28
Character suggestions ..................... 26
Deleting characters ......................... 26
Entering a space .............................. 26
Entering characters ......................... 26
Gesture control ................................ 24
Handwriting recognition ................... 26
Operating the touchpad ................... 24
Overview .......................................... 23
Quick access for Audio .................... 28
Selecting a menu item ..................... 24
Switching ......................................... 23
Switching input line ......................... 27
Track
Selecting (CD, DVD, MP3) .............. 143
Traffic reports
Calling up a list ................................ 78
Real-time traffic report .................... 78
Trunk lid opening height restric-
tion
Activating/deactivating
(COMAND) ....................................... 46
U
Updating the digital map .................... 86
USB audio mode
Selecting a track ............................ 143
USB devices
Connecting to the Media Inter-
face ............................................... 142
see Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode
V
Vehicle
Data acquisition ............................... 16
Vehicle settings
Calling up ......................................... 44
Video
see Video DVD
Video DVD
Control option ................................ 155
DVD menu ..................................... 157
DVD's control menu ...................... 157
Full-screen mode ........................... 156
Function restrictions ...................... 155
Menu options ................................. 156
Notes on discs ............................... 155
Overview ........................................ 156
Overview of DVD functions ............ 157
Pause function ............................... 158
Picture settings .............................. 156
Playing conditions .......................... 155
Safety notes .................................. 154
Selecting a scene/chapter ............ 158
Stop function ................................. 158
Switching to ................................... 156
Video menu ................................... 157
Voice Control System
Settings ........................................... 38
see Voice Control System
Volume, adjusting
Navigation messages ....................... 28
W
Weather map (SIRIUS)
Activating/deactivating display
levels ............................................. 166
Calling up ....................................... 165
Legend ........................................... 168
Moving ........................................... 165
Showing/hiding the menu ............. 165
Storm overview .............................. 169
Storm watch areas ......................... 168
Time stamp .................................... 168
Weather memory (SIRIUS)
Selecting an area ........................... 165
Storing an area .............................. 165
Web browser
Entering a web address ................. 125
WiFi
Activating ......................................... 38
Changing the name of the SSID ....... 39
Connecting the device ..................... 38
Connecting via security key ............. 39
Index
13
Connecting via WPS PBC .................39
Connecting via WPS PIN .................. 38
14
Index
Operating safety
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you operate information systems and com-
munication equipment integrated in the vehi-
cle when driving, you may be distracted from
the traffic situation. You could also lose con-
trol of the vehicle. There is a risk of an acci-
dent.
Only operate this equipment when the traffic
situation permits. If you are not sure that this
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention
to traffic conditions and operate the equip-
ment when the vehicle is stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating the multimedia system.
The multimedia system calculates the route to
the destination without taking account of the
following, for example:
R
traffic lights
R
stop and yield signs
R
merging lanes
R
parking or stopping in a no parking/no stop-
ping zone
R
other road and traffic rules and regulations
R
narrow bridges
The multimedia system may provide incorrect
navigation recommendations if the actual
street/traffic situation does not correspond
with the digital map's data. Digital maps do not
cover all areas nor all routes in an area. For
example, a route may have been diverted or the
direction of a one-way street may have changed.
For this reason, you must always observe road
and traffic rules and regulations during your
journey. Road and traffic rules and regulations
always have priority over the system's driving
recommendations.
Navigation announcements are intended to
direct you while driving without diverting your
attention from the road and driving.
Please always use this feature instead of con-
sulting the map display for directions. Looking
at the icons or map display can distract you from
traffic conditions and driving, and increase the
risk of an accident.
Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle covers a
distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every
second.
This equipment complies with FCC radiation
exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equip-
ment and
meets t
he FCC radio frequency (RF)
Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65.
This equipment has very low levels of RF energy
that is deemed to comply without maximum
permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). How-
ever, it is recommended to install it at a distance
of at least 8 inches (approx. 20 cm) between the
radiation source and a person's body (not
including limbs such as hands, wrists, feet and
legs).
G
WARNING
Modifications to electronic components, their
software as well as wiring can impair their
function and/or the function of other net-
worked components. In particular, systems
relevant to safety could also be affected. As a
result, these may no longer function as inten-
ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety of
the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an
accident and injury.
Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec-
tronic components or their software. You
should have all work to electrical and elec-
tronic equipment carried out at a qualified
specialist workshop.
Declarations of conformity
Vehicle components which receive
and/or transmit radio waves
USA only: The wireless devices of this vehicle
comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation
is subject to the following two conditions:
1) These devices may not cause interference,
and
2) These devices must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment.
Introduction
15
Z
Canada only: The wireless devices of this vehi-
cle comply with Industry Canada license-
exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
1) These devices may not cause interference,
and
2) These devices must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Correct use
You need to observe the following information
when using the multimedia system:
R
the safety notes in this manual
R
traffic rules and regulations
R
laws and safety standards pertaining to motor
vehicles
Using roof carriers may impair the correct func-
tioning of a roof antenna (phone, satellite radio,
GPS).
Attaching metalized retrofit film to the wind-
shield may affect radio reception. This can have
a negative impact on all other antennas (e.g.
emergency call antenna) in the vehicle interior.
Protection against theft: this device is equip-
ped with technical provisions to protect it
against theft. Further information on protection
against theft can be obtained from an author-
ized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Qualified specialist workshop
Read the information on qualified specialist
workshops in the vehicle Operator's Manual.
Function restrictions
For safety reasons, some functions are restric-
ted or unavailable while the vehicle is in motion.
You will notice this, for example, because either
you will not be able to select certain menu items
or a message will appear to this effect.
Data stored in the vehicle
Data recording
A wide range of electronic components in your
vehicle contain data memories.
These data memories temporarily or perma-
nently store technical information about:
R
the vehicle's operating state
R
events
R
malfunctions
In general, this technical information docu-
ments the state of a component, a module, a
system or the surroundings.
These include, for example:
R
operating conditions of system components,
e.g. fluid levels
R
the vehicle's status messages and those of its
individual components, e.g. number of wheel
revolutions/speed, deceleration in move-
ment, lateral acceleration, accelerator pedal
position
R
malfunctions and defects in important system
components, e.g. lights, brakes
R
vehicle reactions and operating conditions in
special driving situations, e.g. air bag deploy-
ment, intervention of stability control sys-
tems
R
ambient conditions, e.g. outside temperature
This data is of an exclusively technical nature
and can be used to:
R
assist in detecting and rectifying malfunc-
tions and defects
R
analyze vehicle functions, e.g. after an acci-
dent
R
optimize vehicle function
The data cannot be used to trace the vehicle's
movements.
When your vehicle is serviced, technical infor-
mation can be read from the event data memory
and fault data memory.
Services include, for example:
R
repair services
R
service processes
R
warranty events
R
quality assurance
The vehicle is read out by employees of the ser-
vice network (including the manufacturer) using
special diagnostic testers. You can obtain more
information there, if required.
16
Introduction
After a malfunction has been rectified, the infor-
mation is deleted from the malfunction memory
or is continually overwritten.
When operating the vehicle, situations are con-
ceivable in which this technical data, in connec-
tion with other information (if necessary, after
consultation with an authorized expert), could
be traced to a person.
Examples include:
R
accident reports
R
damage to the vehicle
R
witness statements
Further additional functions that have been con-
tractually agreed upon with the customer allow
certain vehicle data to be conveyed by the vehi-
cle as well. The additional functions include, for
example, vehicle location in case of an emer-
gency.
Multimedia system/mbrace
If the vehicle is equipped with multimedia sys-
tem or mbrace, additional data about the vehi-
cle’s operation, the use of the vehicle in certain
situations, and the location of the vehicle may
be compiled through the multimedia system or
the mbrace system.
For additional information please refer to the
multimedia system User Manual and/or the
mbrace Terms and Conditions.
Event data recorders
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record data that will assist in understanding
how a vehicle’s systems performed in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as dur-
ing air bag deployment or when hitting a road
obstacle. The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds
or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
such data as:
R
how various systems in your vehicle are oper-
ating
R
whether or not the driver and passenger seat
belts are fastened
R
how far (if at all) the driver is depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal and
R
how fast the vehicle is traveling
This data can help provide a better understand-
ing of the circumstances in which crashes and
injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data is recorded by
your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation
occurs; no data is recorded by the EDR under
normal driving conditions and no personal data
(e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, can combine the EDR data wi
th
the ty
pe of personal identification data routinely
acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip-
ment is required, and access to the vehicle or
the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties that have the spe-
cial equipment, such as law enforcement, can
read the information by accessing the vehicle or
the EDR.
EDR data may be used in civil and criminal mat-
ters as a tool in accident reconstruction, acci-
dent claims, and vehicle safety. Since the Crash
Data Retrieval CDR tool that is used to extract
data from the EDR is commercially available,
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC (“MBUSA”) expressly
disclaims any and all liability arising from the
extraction of this information by unauthorized
Mercedes-Benz personnel.
MBUSA will not share EDR data with others
without the consent of the vehicle owners or, if
the vehicle is leased, without the consent of the
lessee. Exceptions to this representation
include responses to subpoenas by law enforce-
ment; by federal, state or local government; in
connection with or arising out of litigation involv-
ing MBUSA or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or,
as required by law.
Warning: The EDR is a component
of the Su
p-
plemental Restraint System (“SRS”) Module.
Tampering with, altering, modifying or removing
the EDR component may result in a malfunction
of the SRS Module and other systems.
State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that
conflict with federal regulation are pre-empted.
This means that in the event of such conflict, the
federal regulation governs. As of February 2013,
13 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs.
Introduction
17
Z
Information on copyright
Information on licenses for free and Open
Source software used in your vehicle and in the
electronic components can be found on this
website: http://www.mercedes-benz.com/
opensource.
Your multimedia system equipment
These operating instructions describe all the
standard and optional equipment of your multi-
media system, as available at the time of going
to press. Country-specific differences are pos-
sible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not
feature all functions described here. This also
applies to safety-relevant systems and func-
tions.
Read the information on qualified specialist
workshops in the vehicle Operator's Manual.
18
Introduction
Overview
Components
:
Multimedia system display
;
Single DVD drive
=
Touchpad (for multimedia system with touchpad)
?
Controller
The multimedia system consists of:
R
the display
The display has 960 x 540 pixels
R
the single DVD drive
R
the buttons
R
the controller
R
the touchpad (for multimedia system with touchpad)
R
ports in the center console (2 x USB, SD-card slot)
An iPod
®
is connected via a USB cable.
For the multimedia system with touchpad: the controller and touchpad provide two options for
entering characters and selecting functions.
Functions
R
HD FM radio and HD AM radio/satellite
radio
R
Media
-
Media support: audio CD, MP3 CD, DVD
video, two connection options for USB or
Media Interface (e.g. iPod
®
), SD card, Blue-
tooth
®
audio, 10.8 GB Media Register on
the hard drive
-
Music search using all media
R
Sound system
You can select from two sound systems:
-
Standard sound system
-
Burmester
®
surround sound system
Overview
19
Overview and operation
R
Navigation system
-
Navigation via the hard drive
-
Destination entry using keyword search
-
Realistic 3D map with textured city models
-
Personal POIs and routes using SD memory
card
-
Dynamic route guidance with traffic reports
via SIRIUS satellite radio
-
Additional navigation system functions,
such as Drive Information
R
Communication
-
Messaging functions (text messages,
email)
-
Address book
-
Web browser
-
Mercedes-Benz Apps with online search,
Facebook, stock prices, news and much
more
-
Mercedes-Benz Companion app
-
Mercedes-Benz Mobile Website
-
Wi-Fi interface for the connection of a
smartphone to the multimedia system
R
SIRIUS Weather
-
Weather data as an information chart (cur-
rent forecast, 5-day preview, detailed infor-
mation)
-
Weather data on the weather map, e.g. rain
radar data, storm characteristics and the
track of tropical cyclones (hurricanes,
typhoons)
R
Vehicle functions
-
Vehicle settings, e.g. ambient lighting
-
360° camera
-
Rear view camera
-
Climate control functions, e.g. climate
mode
-
DYNAMIC SELECT (individual drive pro-
gram)
R
Favorites button
-
fast access to favorites on the controller or
on the touchpad
-
adds and edits favorites
Display
General notes
!
Avoid any direct contact with the display
surface. Pressure on the display surface may
result in impairments to the display, which
could be irreversible.
Wearing polarized sunglasses may impair your
ability to read the display.
The display has an automatic temperature-con-
trolled switch-off feature. The brightness is
automatically reduced if the temperature is too
high. The display may then temporarily switch
off completely.
Overview
:
Status bar with displays
;
Cover view (if available)
=
Main display field
?
Climate control status display
The example shows media playback in SD card
mode.
Cleaning instructions
!
Do not touch the display. The display has a
very sensitive high-gloss surface; there is a
risk of scratching. If you have to clean the
screen, however, use a mild cleaning agent
and a soft, lint-free cloth.
The display must be switched off and have
cooled down before you start cleaning. Clean
the display screen, when necessary, with a com-
mercially available microfiber cloth and cleaning
agent for TFT and LCD displays. Do not apply
pressure to the display surface when cleaning it,
as this could cause irreversible damage to the
display. Then, dry the surface with a dry micro-
fiber cloth.
20
Overview
Overview and operation
Avoid using alcoholic thinners, gasoline or abra-
sive cleaning agents. These could damage the
display surface.
Buttons and controller
Overview
Example: buttons and controller with touchpad
:
Navigation button
;
Radio button
=
Media button
?
Telephone and address book button
A
Vehicle and system settings button
B
Back button
C
Favorites button
D
Adjusts the volume or mutes
E
Switches the multimedia system on/off
F
Controller
For Mercedes-AMG vehicles with a switchable AMG Performance exhaust system:
D
R
Turning: adjusts the volume
R
Pressing: switches the multimedia system on/off
E
Adjusts the volume of the AMG Performance exhaust system (see the vehicle
Operator's Manual)
Back button
You can use the % button to exit a menu or to
call up the display of the current operating
mode.
Overview
21
Overview and operation
X
To exit the menu: briefly press the %
button.
The multimedia system changes to the next
higher menu level in the current operating
mode.
X
To call up the highest level menu: press the
% button for longer than two seconds.
Controller
The controller in the center console lets you:
R
select menu items on the display
R
enter characters
R
select a destination on the map
R
save entries
The controller can be:
R
turned 3
R
slid left or right 1
R
slid forwards or back 4
R
slid diagonally 2
R
pressed briefly or pressed and held7
Favorites button
With the favorites button, you can select, add or
edit favorites.
X
Press the favorites button on the controller.
The favorites are displayed.
X
To select a favorite: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Press the controller.
Other functions (Y page 33).
Touchpad
Multimedia system with touchpad: alternatively,
you can use the touchpad to select and enter
information (
Y page 23).
Multifunction steering wheel
:
Multifunction display
;
Right control panel
=
Left control panel
Left control panel
ò
R
Calls up the main menu
9
:
Press briefly:
R
Scrolls in lists
R
Selects a menu or function
R
In the Radio/Media menu: opens
the track or station list and selects
a station, an audio track or a video
scene
R
In the Telephone menu: switches
to the phone book and selects a
name or a telephone number
9
:
Press and hold:
R
Scrolls quickly through all lists
R
In the Radio/Media menu: selects
a station, audio track or video
scene using rapid scrolling
R
In the Telephone menu: starts
rapid scrolling if the phone book is
open
22
Overview
Overview and operation
a
R
In all menus: confirms the selected
entry in the list
R
In the Radio/Media menu: opens
the list of available radio sources
and media
R
In the Telephone menu: switches
to the phone book and starts dial-
ing the selected number
ñ
Switches off the Voice Control Sys-
tem (see the separate operating
instructions)
%
Press briefly:
R
Back
R
In the Radio/Media menu: dese-
lects the track, station list or list of
available radio sources and media
R
Hides display messages
R
Exits the telephone book/redial
memory
%
Press and hold:
R
Calls up the standard display in the
Trip
menu
Right control panel
~
R
Rejects or ends a call
R
Exits the telephone book/redial
memory
6
R
Makes or accepts a call
R
Switches to the redial memory
W
X
R
Adjusts the volume
8
R
Mute
ó
Switches on the Voice Control Sys-
tem (see the separate operating
instructions)
Touchpad
Touchpad overview
!
Do not use any sharp objects on the touch-
pad. This could damage the touchpad.
:
Touch-sensitive surface
;
Favorites button
=
Calls up quick access for audio
?
Back button
Using the touchpad, you can:
R
select menu items (Y page 24)
R
enter characters (handwriting recognition)
(
Y page 26)
R
control the active audio source
(
Y page 28)
R
create, manage and call up favorites
(
Y page 33)
R
enter destinations in the navigation system
R
save entries
Further information on operating the touchpad
(
Y page 24).
Switching the touchpad on/off
X
Press the Ø button.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To select System Settings: slide 6, turn
and press the controller.
A menu appears.
X
To select Touchpad: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Activate Touchpad.
The touchpad is switched on O or off ª.
Touchpad
23
Overview and operation
Operating the touchpad
Selecting a menu item
X
Use one finger to touch the touch-sensitive
surface.
X
Swipe your finger up, down, to the left or right.
The selection in the display moves in accord-
ance with the direction of movement. You can
navigate in lists or menus in this way.
Confirming a selection
Do not press your finger too hard on the touch-
pad. This could cause malfunctions.
X
Use one finger to press the touch-sensitive
surface until you reach the pressure point.
A menu, an option or an application is started.
Calling up quick access for audio
X
Use two fingers to touch the lower part of the
touch-sensitive surface.
X
Swipe your fingers up.
Quick access is displayed.
Further information on quick access for audio
(
Y page 28).
Hiding quick access for audio
X
Use two fingers to touch the touch-sensitive
surface.
X
Swipe your fingers down.
Quick access is hidden.
Operating the control for vehicle and
sound settings
24
Touchpad
Overview and operation
X
Touch the touch-sensitive surface with two
fingers, spaced slightly apart.
X
Turn both fingers clockwise.
The control setting is increased.
or
X
Turn both fingers counter-clockwise.
The control setting is decreased.
Moving the map
X
Use one finger to press the touch-sensitive
surface until you reach the pressure point.
The crosshair is shown.
X
Touch the touch-sensitive surface again with
one finger.
X
Swipe your finger in any direction.
The map is moved is the direction of move-
ment.
Zooming in on the map
X
Touch the touch-sensitive surface with two
fingers, spaced slightly apart.
X
Glide your fingers away from each other.
The map scale is magnified.
Zooming out of the map
X
Touch the touch-sensitive surface with two
fingers, spaced far apart.
X
Glide your fingers towards each other.
The map scale is reduced.
Touchpad
25
Overview and operation
Handwriting recognition
Handwriting recognition overview
:
Active input line
;
Inserts a space (Y page 26)
=
Illustration of the touch-sensitive surface
?
Deletes characters (Y page 26)
You can use handwriting recognition for text,
numbers or characters in any input line.
If the character that you have entered can be
interpreted in different ways, these options are
displayed. More information on the character
suggestions (
Y page 26).
You can additionally switch the handwriting rec-
ognition read-aloud function on and off.
:
To exit the menu
;
To return to handwriting recognition
=
To use the phone book or text templates
?
To change the input line or the position of
the cursor
A
To change the input language
B
To finish character entry
X
To display the menu: press the touchpad.
Switching the text reader function of
the handwriting recognition on/off
You can switch the text reader function of the
handwriting recognition on or off.
X
Press the Ø button.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To select System Settings: slide 6, turn
and press the controller.
A menu appears.
X
To select Touchpad: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Read Out Handwriting Recog‐
nition: turn and press the controller.
The text reader function is switched on O or
off ª.
Entering characters
Requirement: an input line for text, numbers or
characters has been selected.
X
Use one finger to draw the desired character
on the touch-sensitive surface.
The character recognized is entered in the
input line. You can draw the next character on
the touch-sensitive surface.
If the character can be interpreted in different
ways, these options are displayed.
More information on the character suggestions
(
Y page 26).
Character suggestions
X
To select a character suggestion: turn the
controller.
The selected character is entered instead of
the automatically recognized character. Char-
acter entry can be continued.
Inserting a space
Requirement: an input line for text, numbers or
characters has been selected.
X
Use your finger to touch the touch-sensitive
surface and swipe to the right.
A space is entered into the input line.
Deleting characters
Requirement: an input line for text, numbers or
characters has been selected.
26
Touchpad
Overview and operation
X
Use your finger to touch the touch-sensitive
surface and swipe to the left.
The character last entered is deleted.
Switching input lines
X
Press the touchpad.
A symbol is shown.
X
To select p: swipe your finger to the left or
right and press.
X
To select the input line: swipe up or down and
press.
The selected input line is active and character
entry can be continued.
Moving the cursor within the input line
X
Press the touchpad.
A symbol is shown.
X
To select p: glide your finger to the left or
right and press.
X
To move the cursor: glide to the left or right.
Changing the input language for hand-
writing recognition
Requirement: an input line for text, numbers or
characters has been selected.
X
Press the touchpad.
A symbol is shown.
X
To select B: swipe your finger to the left or
right and press.
The list of available input languages appears.
X
To select a language: swipe up or down and
press.
The input language for handwriting recogni-
tion has been changed.
Searching in lists
The phone book search is used as an example.
You determine the first letter of the contact you
are looking for with the first character you enter.
X
Draw the letter on the touchpad surface.
The first contact with the selected first char-
acter is highlighted in the phone book.
Further information on handwriting recogni-
tion on the touchpad (
Y page 26).
X
Draw additional letters on the touchpad sur-
face one after another.
X
To complete the search and return to the
phone book: press the touchpad.
Switching between the controller and
the touchpad as input device
Requirement: an input line for text, numbers or
characters has been selected.
X
To switch from character entry using the
controller to handwriting recognition on
the touchpad: use one finger to press the
touchpad.
Handwriting recognition on the touchpad is
active.
X
To switch from handwriting recognition
on the touchpad to character entry using
the controller: press the controller.
Character entry using the controller is active.
Touchpad
27
Overview and operation
Quick access for audio
Depending on the audio source that is currently
activated, you can use this function to select the
next station or music track.
X
Call up quick access (Y page 24).
The current audio source is displayed.
X
To select the previous or next station or music
track: swipe to the left or right.
The selected station or music track is played.
Basic functions
Switching the multimedia system on/
off
X
Press the Ü button on the center console
to the right of the controller.
The multimedia system calls up the previously
selected menu.
If you switch the multimedia system off, play-
back of the current media source will also be
switched off.
Adjusts the volume
Adjusting the volume for media sources
X
Turn the thumbwheel to the right of the con-
troller.
or
X
Press the W or X button on the multi-
function steering wheel.
The volume of the media source currently
selected changes.
Adjusting the volume for traffic
announcements and navigation
announcements
During traffic or navigation announcements:
X
Turn the thumbwheel to the right of the con-
troller.
or
X
Press the W or X button on the multi-
function steering wheel.
i
You can set the volume for navigation
announcements to be different from the vol-
ume of the respective media source.
Adjusting the volume for phone calls
You can adjust the volume for hands-free mode
during a telephone call.
X
Turn the thumbwheel to the right of the con-
troller.
or
X
Press the W or X button on the multi-
function steering wheel.
i
Setting the volume for the Voice Control
System voice output; see the separate oper-
ating instructions.
Switching the sound on or off
Media source sound
X
Press the thumbwheel to the right of the con-
troller.
or
X
Press the 8 button on the multifunction
steering wheel.
i
If the audio output is switched off, the status
line will show the 8 symbol. If you switch
the media source or change the volume, the
sound is automatically switched on.
i
Even if the sound is switched off, you will still
hear navigation system announcements.
28
Basic functions
Overview and operation
Switching navigation announcements
off and on again
X
To switch off navigation announcements:
press the thumbwheel to the right of the con-
troller during the announcement.
The Spoken driving recommendations
have been deactivated. message
appears.
X
To switch navigation announcements on
again: switch the multimedia system off and
then on again (
Y page 28).
or
X
Start a new route calculation (Y page 59).
or
X
While route guidance is active, show the
menu and select +(
Y page 74).
Basic menu displays
X
Press the Õ button or the ß, $,
%, or Ø button.
Navigation: the map displays the current
vehicle position.
Radio: the display of the radio mode last set
appears.
Media: the display for the media source last
set appears. In the example, SD card mode is
set.
Telephone: the display for the telephone
menu appears.
Vehicle functions: the vehicle functions dis-
play appears.
X
To show the menu: slide 4 the controller.
The menu for the selected functions appears.
Depending on the operation, the marking is
shown in main function bar : or menu
bar ;.
X
To select a menu item: turn and press the
controller.
Once you have selected a menu item in :,
the last menu set for the selected function
appears.
Menu bar ; offers options in the current
media mode.
Selecting the operating mode for a
main function
You can select the available operating modes for
the main functions, e.g. telephone.
In the telephone menu, you can:
R
switch to telephone mode
R
call up the address book
R
call up the Digital Operator's Manual for the
telephone
X
Press the % button.
If telephone mode was the last mode selec-
ted, the telephone menu appears.
Basic functions
29
Overview and operation
X
To call up the menu: press the % button
again.
or
X
To select Phone: slide 5 and press the con-
troller.
A menu appears. Phone
is at the front.
X
To select Address Book, for example: turn
and press the controller.
Character entry (telephony)
Writing a text message is used as an example.
Further information on writing a text message
(
Y page 116).
X
To select a character: turn and press the
controller.
The character selected in character bar ; is
entered into telephone number input line :.
X
To delete a character: to switch to the bot-
tom line of the character bar: slide 6 the
controller.
X
To select %: turn and press the controller.
The character last entered is deleted.
X
To switch input line: to switch to the bottom
line of the character bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select 5, turn and press the controller.
or
X
Slide 5 the controller repeatedly until the
character bar disappears.
X
To select the input line for the text of the
text message: slide 6 and press the con-
troller.
The input line for the text of the text message
is selected. The character bar has been adap-
ted for entering text.
X
To select a character: turn and press the
controller.
The character selected in character bar ? is
entered into text message input line =.
X
To delete a character: to switch to the bot-
tom line of the character bar: slide 6 the
controller.
X
To select %: turn and press the controller.
The character last entered is deleted.
X
To delete a whole entry: to switch to the
bottom line of the character bar: slide 6 the
controller.
X
To select %: turn the controller.
X
Press and hold the controller until the entire
entry is deleted.
X
To change the country setting of the char-
acter bar: to switch to the bottom line of the
character bar: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select B, turn and press the controller.
The available languages are displayed.
X
Turn and press the controller.
Functions in the character bar
R
Ä
Switches between digits and symbols
R
*
Switches the character bar to uppercase/
lowercase letters
R
B
Changes the country setting for the character
bar
R
%
Deletes a character/an entry
R
45
Selects the input line
R
23
Moves the cursor within the input line
R
¬
Confirms an entry
30
Character entry (telephony)
Overview and operation
R
&
Cancels input
R
S
Inserts a paragraph
R
y
Uses a text template
Character entry (navigation)
Character entry options
You can enter characters using the controller or
the touchpad. With the controller, you enter
characters using a character bar. To enter using
the touchpad, draw the character in the entry
field. The multimedia system supports this using
a handwriting recognition function.
Entering characters using the charac-
ter bar
:
Characters STUT entered by the user
(orange)
;
Characters automatically added by the mul-
timedia system EBÜLL
=
Switches to keyword search
?
Characters not currently available
A
Currently selected character
B
Characters currently available
C
Character bar
The example shows the address entry
(
Y page 57).
X
To enter a character: turn, slide 6 or 5
and press the controller.
Selected character : is entered in the upper
line. The multimedia system adds the missing
characters and shows the entry that best
matches the current input.
The characters are available B or not ?,
depending on the characters already entered
and the data stored in the digital map.
The G symbol indicates that an entry exists
more than once.
X
To delete a character: slide 6 and turn the
controller, then press it after selecting %.
X
To delete an entire entry: slide 6 and turn
the controller, then after selecting % press
and hold down the controller until the entire
entry is deleted.
X
To switch to keyword search: slide 6 and
turn the controller, then press it after select-
ing = (
Y page 59).
X
To confirm an entry: slide 6 and turn the
controller, then press it after selecting¬.
or
X
Slide 5 the controller repeatedly until the
character bar disappears.
The location selection list appears. The selec-
ted entry is highlighted.
:
Cursor
;
Entry line
The example shows the character entry when
you save a destination as a navigable contact in
the address book (
Y page 58).
X
To select an input line: slide 6 and turn
the controller, then press it after selecting 4
or 5.
or
X
Slide 5 the controller repeatedly until the
character bar disappears.
X
Turn and press the controller.
X
To move the cursor: select the input line.
X
Slide 6 and turn the controller, then press it
after selecting 2 or 3.
Character entry (navigation)
31
Overview and operation
X
To change the character bar language:
slide 6 and turn the controller, then press it
after selecting B.
A menu appears.
X
To select the language: turn and press the
controller.
The character set for the selected language is
set.
Functions in the character bar
R
Ä
Switches between digits and symbols
R
*
Switches the character bar to uppercase/
lowercase letters
R
B
Changes the country setting for the character
bar
R
%
Deletes a character/an entry
R
è
Switches to keyword search (
Y page 59)
R
45
Selects the input line
R
23
Moves the cursor within the input line
R
¬
Confirms an entry
R
&
Cancels input
Entering characters using the touch-
pad
Alternatively, you can enter characters using the
touchpad (
Y page 23). Character entry is sup-
ported by a handwriting recognition function.
An example is the address entry (
Y page 57).
X
With one finger, draw the desired character,
e.g. the letter B
, on the touch-sensitive sur-
face.
In the list (e.g. City), the first entry that starts
with the letter entered is highlighted. You can
draw the next character on the touch-sensi-
tive surface.
If the character that you have entered can be
interpreted in different ways, these options
are displayed.
X
To select a character suggestion: turn the
controller.
The selected character is used for the list dis-
play instead of the automatically recognized
character. Character entry can be continued.
X
To delete a character: touch the touch-sen-
sitive surface with your finger and glide your
finger to the left.
The character last entered is deleted.
X
To complete the entry and switch to the
list: press the touchpad.
32
Character entry (navigation)
Overview and operation
Favorites
Overview of favorites
:
Adds a new favorite (Y page 33)
;
Renames a selected favorite (Y page 33)
=
Moves a selected favorite (Y page 33)
?
Deletes a selected favorite (Y page 34)
X
To display the favorites overview: press
the favorites button on the controller.
X
To show the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
You can manage a total of 20 favorites.
Displaying and selecting favorites
X
Press the favorites button on the controller.
The favorites are displayed.
X
To call up a favorite: turn and press the con-
troller.
Adding favorites
Adding predefined favorites
X
Press the favorites button on the controller.
X
To show the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Reassign: turn and press the con-
troller.
The categories and predefined favorites are
displayed.
X
To select a category: turn and press the
controller.
The available favorites are displayed.
X
To select a favorite: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To add a favorite at the desired position:
turn and press the controller.
If there is already a favorite at this position,
then this will be deleted.
Adding your own favorites
You can store phone numbers from the phone
book, radio stations or destinations as favorites.
A phone number from the phone book is used as
an example.
X
Call up the phone book (Y page 101).
X
Search for and highlight a contact
(
Y page 101).
X
To add a telephone number as a favorite
at the desired position: press and hold the
favorites button on the controller until the
favorites are displayed.
X
Turn and press the controller.
If there is already a favorite at this position, it
will be deleted and replaced by a new one.
Renaming favorites
X
Press the favorites button on the controller.
The favorites are displayed.
X
To select a favorite to be renamed: turn the
controller.
X
To show the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Rename: turn and press the control-
ler.
X
Enter characters using the controller
(
Y page 30) or the touchpad (Y page 26).
X
To finish the entry: select OK .
The favorite has been renamed.
Moving favorites
X
Press the favorites button on the controller.
The favorites are displayed.
X
To select a favorite to be moved: turn the
controller.
X
To show the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
Favorites
33
Overview and operation
X
To select Move: turn and press the controller.
X
To store a favorite in the desired order:
turn and press the controller.
If a favorite is stored over another favorite, the
favorite underneath is deleted.
Deleting favorites
X
Press the favorites button on the controller.
The favorites are displayed.
X
To select a favorite to be deleted: turn the
controller.
X
To show the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Delete: turn and press the control-
ler.
X
To select Yes: turn and press the controller.
The favorite is deleted.
X
If you select No, the process is canceled.
34
Favorites
Overview and operation
Your multimedia system equipment
These operating instructions describe all the
standard and optional equipment of your multi-
media system, as available at the time of going
to press. Country-specific differences are pos-
sible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not
feature all functions described here. This also
applies to safety-relevant systems and func-
tions.
Read the information on qualified specialist
workshops in the vehicle Operator's Manual.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you operate mobile communication equip-
ment when driving, you may be distracted
from the traffic situation. You could also lose
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
accident.
Only operate this equipment when the vehicle
is stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating mobile communications equipment in
the vehicle.
Display settings
Setting the brightness
The brightness detected by the display light sen-
sor affects the setting options for this function.
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select System Settings: turn and press
the controller.
A menu appears.
X
To select Display: turn and press the con-
troller.
A menu appears.
X
Select Brightness .
A control appears.
X
Select the desired brightness.
Display design
The display features optimized designs for day-
time and night-time operation. You can set the
design by manually selecting day or night design
or opt for an automatic setting.
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select System Settings: turn and press
the controller.
A menu appears.
X
To select Display: turn and press the con-
troller.
A menu appears.
X
Select Day Mode, Night Mode or Auto.
The # dot indicates the current setting.
Design Explanation
Day Mode
The display is set perma-
nently to day design.
Night Mode
The display is set perma-
nently to night design.
Automatic
The multimedia system
evaluates the data of the
light sensor and automat-
ically switches over the
display design.
Display settings
35
System settings
Z
Switching the display on/off
Switching off the display
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To select Display Off: slide 6, turn and
press the controller.
The display goes out.
X
To switch the display on again: press the
controller.
Time settings
General information
The multimedia system can automatically set
the time and date.
The following navigation system functions
require the time, time zone and summer/stand-
ard time to be set correctly in order to work
properly:
R
route guidance on routes with time-depend-
ent traffic guidance
R
calculation of expected time of arrival
Switching automatic time on and off
The Automatic Time Settings function is
used to activate or deactivate the automatic
setting of the time and date. This function is
activated when the vehicle leaves the factory.
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Time: turn and press the controller.
A menu appears.
X
To switch Automatic Time Settings on O
or off ª: turn and press the controller.
Setting the time zone
To set the time zone, the Automatic Time
Settings function must be activated.
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Time: turn and press the controller.
A menu appears.
X
To select Time Zone:: turn and press the
controller.
A list of countries appears. The # dot indi-
cates the current setting.
X
To select the country in which you are
currently driving: turn and press the con-
troller.
The country is accepted.
A time zone list may also be displayed,
depending on the country selected.
X
To select the desired time zone: turn and
press the controller.
The time zone is accepted.
A list of available options for setting summer
time appears (
Y page 36).
Setting summer and standard time
Using the Daylight Saving Time function,
you can set the automatic changeover to sum-
mer time or switch the summer time settings on
and off. The changeover to summer time advan-
ces the time by one hour.
The Daylight
Saving Time function or Auto‐
matic option is not available in all countries.
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Time: turn and press the controller.
A menu appears.
X
To select Daylight Saving Time: turn and
press the controller.
A list of available options for setting summer
time appears.
X
To select Automatic, On or Off: turn and
press the controller.
36
Time settings
System settings
Setting Function
Automatic
The summer and
standard time are
automatically
changed over.
On
The clock is advanced
one hour ahead of
standard time.
Off
The standard time for
the chosen time zone
is selected.
Manual time setting
Using the manual time settings, you can set the
time forwards or backwards by up to several
hours.
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Time: turn and press the controller.
A menu appears.
X
To select Set Time Manually: turn and
press the controller.
An analog clock appears.
X
To set the hour: turn the controller.
X
To highlight minutes: slide 9 the control-
ler.
X
To set minutes: turn and press the controller.
The time is accepted.
The Automatic
function is deactivated ª.
i
If Automatic is reactivated, the previous
settings for time zone and summer time
changeover are restored.
Setting the time and date format
Use this function to set the time and date format
for all displays in the vehicle.
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Time: turn and press the controller.
A menu appears.
X
To select Format: turn and press the control-
ler.
X
To select the desired date format: turn and
press the controller.
The # dot indicates the current setting.
X
To select the desired time format: turn and
press the controller.
The # dot indicates the current setting.
Abbreviation Meaning
YYYY/MM/DD
Year/Month/Day
date format, year (all
four digits)
YY/MM/DD
Year/Month/Day
date format, year
(two digits)
MM/DD/YYYY
Month/Day/Year
date format, year (all
four digits)
DD/MM/YYYY
Day/Month/Year
date format, year (all
four digits)
HH:MM (24 hrs)
Hours : Minutes
(24 hour time format)
HH:MM (AM/PM)
Hours : Minutes
(AM/PM time format)
Text reader settings
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
Text reader settings
37
System settings
Z
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select System Settings: turn and press
the controller.
A menu appears.
X
To select Text Reader Speed: turn and
press the controller.
A list appears.
X
Select Fast, Medium or Slow.
The # dot indicates the current setting.
Voice Control System settings
Opening/closing the help window
i
If the set system language is not supported
by the Voice Control System, English will be
selected.
The help window also shows you information on
audible instructions:
R
during individualization
R
during subsequent operation of the Voice
Control System
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select System Settings: turn and press
the controller.
A menu appears.
X
To select Voice Control: turn and press the
controller.
X
To activate O or deactivate ª Help Win‐
dow: turn and press the controller.
More information on the Voice Control System
is available in the separate operating instruc-
tions.
Individualization
Using individualization, you can fine-tune the
Voice Control System to your own voice. This
will help improve voice recognition; see the sep-
arate operating instructions.
Wi-Fi
Overview
Establishing a Wi-Fi connection between the
multimedia system and a Wi-Fi-enabled device,
such as a tablet computer or smartphone,
requires the following:
R
Wi-Fi must be activated on the multimedia
system and on the device to be connected.
If the multimedia system is to be used as a Wi-Fi
hotspot:
R
The multimedia system must be connected to
an Internet-enabled mobile phone via Blue-
tooth
®
or USB.
R
The Internet access data for the mobile phone
network provider must be selected or set in
the multimedia system
R
An Internet connection must be established
on the multimedia system.
Activating Wi-Fi
X
To select Vehicle from the main function bar:
turn and press the controller.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
Select System Settings.
X
Select WiFi.
The Wi-Fi menu appears.
X
Select Activate.
X
Press the controller.
Switch the connection on O or off ª,
depending on the previous setting.
Connecting the device
General notes
The exact Wi-Fi connection procedure may vary
depending on the device to be connected. Fol-
low the instructions that are shown in the dis-
play. Further information; see the manufactur-
er's operating instructions.
Connecting a device via WPS PIN
Requirement: for this type of connection, the
device to be connected must support "Connect
using WPS PIN".
38
Wi-Fi
System settings
X
To select Vehicle from the main function bar:
turn and press the controller.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
Select System Settings.
X
Select WiFi.
The Wi-Fi menu appears.
X
Select Connect via WPS PIN.
X
Select the vehicle from the device to be con-
nected and "Connect using WPS PIN". The
vehicle is displayed with the SSID MB WLAN
XXXXX.
The device to be connected generates a PIN.
X
Also enter this PIN into the multimedia sys-
tem.
Connecting the device by pressing a
button (push button)
Requirement: for this type of connection, the
device to be connected must support "Connect
via push button".
X
To select Vehicle from the main function bar:
turn and press the controller.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
Select System Settings.
X
Select WiFi.
The Wi-Fi menu appears.
X
Select Connect via WPS PBC.
X
Select the vehicle from the device to be con-
nected and Connect
via WPS PBC. The vehi-
cle is displayed with the SSID MB WLAN
XXXXX.
X
Select Continue in the multimedia system.
Connecting the device via the security
key
X
To select Vehicle from the main function bar:
turn and press the controller.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
Select System Settings.
X
Select WiFi.
The Wi-Fi menu appears.
X
Select Connect Using Security Key.
X
Select the vehicle from the device to be con-
nected. The vehicle is displayed with the SSID
MB WLAN XXXXX
.
X
Enter the security key that appears on the
multimedia system display into the device to
be connected.
X
Confirm the entry.
Generating a new security key
X
To select Vehicle from the main function bar:
turn and press the controller.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
Select System Settings.
X
Select WiFi.
The Wi-Fi menu appears.
X
Select Generate Security Key.
X
Select Regenerate.
A new security key is generated.
X
To save the security key: turn the controller
and select Save
.
The Wi-Fi menu appears. The new security key
will now be displayed and verified when a Wi-
Fi connection is established. The connection
must be re-established with the newly cre-
ated security key.
i
Device connections established using the
previous security key will no longer work after
the security key is changed. You have to
reconnect these devices (
Y page 38).
Changing the name of the SSID
X
To select Vehicle from the main function bar:
turn and press the controller.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
Select System Settings.
X
Select WiFi.
The Wi-Fi menu appears.
Wi-Fi
39
System settings
Z
X
Select Change SSID.
A dialog for entering the SSID appears.
X
Enter the new SSID.
X
Select ¬.
X
Press the controller.
From now on, when establishing a connec-
tion, the vehicle will be shown with the new
SSID both on the device to be connected and
in the Connect
Using Security Key menu.
i
Device connections established using the
previous SSID will no longer work after the
SSID is changed. You have to reconnect these
devices (
Y page 38).
Bluetooth
®
settings
General information about Blue-
tooth
®
Bluetooth
®
-capable devices, e.g. mobile
phones, need to comply with a certain profile in
order to be connected to the multimedia sys-
tem. Every Bluetooth
®
device has its own spe-
cific Bluetooth
®
name.
Bluetooth
®
technology is a standard for short-
range wireless data transmissions up to approx-
imately 10 m.
You can use Bluetooth
®
to connect your mobile
phone to the multimedia system, for example:
R
use the hands-free system
R
establish an Internet connection
R
listen to music using Bluetooth
®
Audio
R
exchange vCards
Bluetooth
®
is a registered trademark of Blue-
tooth Special Interest Group (SIG) Inc.
Activating/deactivating Bluetooth
®
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select System Settings: turn and press
the controller.
A menu appears.
X
To activate O or deactivate ª Activate
Bluetooth: turn and press the controller.
Automatic volume adjustment
General information
With the Automatic Volume Adjustmentfunc-
tion, the volumes of different audio sources are
adjusted for each other, to compensate for rel-
ative differences in volume.
For example: changing from a relatively quiet to
a relatively loud radio station. The volume for
both stations sounds the same. Manual read-
justment of the volume is not required.
The Automatic Volume Adjustment
function
is deactivated ª when the vehicle leaves the
factory. Using this function, the dynamic range
of the music is slightly reduced. To make the
most of the audiophile sound quality, it is rec-
ommended to leave it off.
Switching the automatic volume
adjustment on/off
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select System Settings: turn and press
the controller.
A menu appears.
X
To select Automatic Volume Adjustment:
turn and press the controller.
Switch the Automatic Volume Adjustment
function on O or off ª.
Setting the system language
General information
This function allows you to determine the lan-
guage for the menu displays and the navigation
40
Setting the system language
System settings
messages. The selected language affects the
characters available for entry.
i
The navigation announcements are not
available in all languages. If a language is not
available, the navigation announcements will
be in English.
i
When you set the system language, the lan-
guage of the Voice Control System will
change accordingly. If it is not supported by
the Voice Control System, English will be
selected.
Setting the system language
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select System Settings: turn and press
the controller.
A menu appears.
X
To select Language: turn and press the con-
troller.
The list of languages appears. The # dot indi-
cates the current setting.
X
Select the desired language.
The multimedia system loads the selected
language and sets it.
Calling up and editing the Favorites
function
The Favorites function can, depending on the
vehicle equipment, be called up as follows:
R
via the System Settings menu
R
via the Favorites button on the controller
(
Y page 21)
R
via the Favorites button on the touchpad
(
Y page 23)
Calling up the Favorites function via the sys-
tem menu
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select System Settings: turn and press
the controller.
A menu appears.
X
To select Favorite Functions: press the
controller.
The favorites are displayed.
X
To select the desired function, e.g. Phone‐
book: turn and press the controller.
Calling up the Favorites function via the
controller or touchpad
X
Press the Favorites button on the controller or
touchpad.
The menu for setting favorites appears.
X
To select the desired function, e.g. Phone‐
book: turn and press the controller.
Exiting the Favorites function
X
Press the Favorites button again.
or
X
Press the % button.
Further information on favorites (
Y page 33).
Importing/exporting data
General notes
!
Never remove the stick or card when writing
data to the USB stick or the memory card. You
may otherwise lose data.
Using this function you can do the following with
your personal data:
R
transfer your data from one multimedia sys-
tem to another multimedia system
The transfer may be limited or not possible,
depending on the vehicle's equipment.
R
make a backup copy of your personal data
(export data) and load it again (import data)
R
protect your data from unwanted export by
activating a pin prompt (presetting: deactiva-
ted ª)
You can either use an SD card or a USB storage
device (e.g. a USB stick) as temporary storage.
You can obtain further information on data
import and export from an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Importing/exporting data
41
System settings
Z
Activating/deactivating PIN protec-
tion
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select System Settings: turn and press
the controller.
A menu appears.
X
To select Data Import/Export: turn and
press the controller.
X
Select Activate PIN Protection.
Activate O or deactivate ª PIN protection.
When activating PIN protection, you will be
prompted to enter a PIN.
X
To enter the 4-digit PIN and select ¬: turn
and press the controller.
You will be prompted to enter the PIN again.
X
Enter the PIN again and select ¬.
The PIN prompt now protects your personal
data from unwanted export.
i
If you deactivate your PIN protection, you
will first be prompted to enter your PIN. If you
have forgotten your PIN, an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center can deactivate your
PIN protection for you. Alternatively, you can
deactivate PIN protection by resetting your
personal data (
Y page 43).
Importing/exporting data
The following data can be exported:
R
address data
R
system settings that you have made
R
bookmarks
R
radio station lists
Personal music files in the Media Register can-
not be saved or transferred using this function.
Mercedes-Benz is not liable for any loss of data.
Connecting a USB storage device
X
Insert the SD memory card (Y page 141).
or
X
Connect a USB device (e.g. a USB memory
stick) (
Y page 142).
Importing or exporting data
i
If you import data such as address data, the
existing data in the multimedia system is
overwritten. You will see a message to this
effect. The multimedia system is restarted
after the data import.
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select System Settings: turn and press
the controller.
A menu appears.
X
To select Data Import/Export: turn and
press the controller.
X
Select Import Data or Export Data.
If PIN protection is activated, a PIN prompt
appears when you select Export Data
.
X
To enter the 4-digit PIN and select ¬: turn
and press the controller.
PIN protection is deactivated.
X
To select Memory Card, USB 1 or USB 2: turn
and press the controller.
This function exports all the data to the selec-
ted disc.
42
Importing/exporting data
System settings
Reset function
General information
You can reset the multimedia system to the fac-
tory settings. Resetting is recommended before
handing over or selling the vehicle, for example.
This includes the deletion of all of your personal
data on the multimedia system. These include,
for example:
R
Station presets
R
Entries in the destination memory
R
Entries in the list of previous destinations in
the navigation system
R
Entries in the address book
R
Authorized telephone
Data on the internal hard drive, e.g. music files in
the Media Register, will be deleted during a
reset.
In addition, an activated PIN protection, which
you have used to protect your data against
unwanted export, will be deactivated during a
reset.
Mercedes-Benz is not liable for any loss of data.
Resetting the multimedia system
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select System Settings: turn and press
the controller.
A menu appears.
X
To select Reset: turn and press the controller.
A prompt appears asking whether you wish to
reset.
X
Select Yes.
A prompt appears again asking whether you
really wish to reset.
X
Select Yes.
A message appears. The multimedia system
is reset to the factory settings and restarted.
Reset function
43
System settings
Z
Your multimedia system equipment
These operating instructions describe all the
standard and optional equipment of your multi-
media system, as available at the time of going
to press. Country-specific differences are pos-
sible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not
feature all functions described here. This also
applies to safety-relevant systems and func-
tions.
Read the information on qualified specialist
workshops in the vehicle Operator's Manual.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you operate mobile communication equip-
ment when driving, you may be distracted
from the traffic situation. You could also lose
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
accident.
Only operate this equipment when the vehicle
is stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating mobile communications equipment in
the vehicle.
Vehicle settings
Calling up vehicle settings
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To select Vehicle Settings: press the con-
troller.
The Vehicle Settings
menu is active.
X
To select the desired vehicle setting: turn and
press the controller.
The main area with the setting element is
active.
Selecting a different vehicle setting:
X
To activate the menu for selecting the vehicle
setting: slide 5 the controller.
Exiting the vehicle settings:
X
To select &: slide 6 and press the con-
troller.
Ambient lighting
General notes
You can make the following settings for the
ambient lighting:
R
Brightness
This setting makes an additional change to
the brightness of the ambient lighting.
R
Color
This setting changes the color of the ambient
lighting.
Setting the brightness
X
Call up Vehicle Settings (Y page 44).
X
To select Ambient Light Brightness: turn
and press the controller.
The setting element is active. The brightness
value is displayed.
X
To change the brightness value: turn the con-
troller.
You can find further information on the interior
lighting in the vehicle Operator's Manual.
Setting the color
X
Call up Vehicle Settings (Y page 44).
X
To select Ambient Light Color: turn and
press the controller.
The setting element is active.
X
To select a color: turn and press the control-
ler.
You can find further information on the interior
lighting in the vehicle Operator's Manual.
Switching the display lighting on/off
Unless the vehicle is equipped with the "Ambi-
ent lighting" package, you can turn the display
lighting on or off with this function.
44
Vehicle settings
Vehicle functions
X
Call up Vehicle Settings (Y page 44).
X
To select Ambient Light: Display: turn
and press the controller.
The function switches on or off, depending on
the previous setting.
i
The brightness can be adjusted using the
controller on the rotary light switch.
You can find further information on the interior
lighting in the vehicle Operator's Manual.
Setting the easy entry and exit feature
This function makes getting in and out of your
vehicle easier.
X
Call up Vehicle Settings (Y page 44).
X
To select Easy Entry/Exit: turn and press
the controller.
The setting element is active.
X
To change the setting: press the controller.
You can find further information on the easy
entry and exit feature in the vehicle Operator's
Manual.
Activating/deactivating the acoustic
locking verification signal
You can also set an audible signal to confirm
that the vehicle has been locked.
X
Call up Vehicle Settings (Y page 44).
X
To select Acoustic Lock Feedback: turn
and press the controller.
The function switches on or off, depending on
the previous setting.
You can find further information on the locking
feature in the vehicle Operator's Manual.
Switching the seat belt adjustment
on/off
The Belt Adjustment function adjusts the driv-
er's and front-passenger seat belt to the upper
body of the vehicle occupants.
X
Call up Vehicle Settings (Y page 44).
X
To select Belt Adjustment: turn and press
the controller.
The function switches on or off, depending on
the previous setting.
You can find further information on seat belt
adjustment in the vehicle Operator's Manual.
Switching the automatic mirror fold-
ing function on/off
When the Automatic Mirror Folding func-
tion is activated, the outside mirrors fold in auto-
matically as soon as you lock the vehicle from
the outside. The outside mirrors fold out auto-
matically again as soon as you unlock the vehi-
cle.
X
Call up Vehicle Settings (Y page 44).
X
To select Automatic Mirror Folding: turn
and press the controller.
The function switches on or off, depending on
the previous setting.
You can find further information on the auto-
matic folding mirror function in the vehicle Oper-
ator's Manual.
Switching locator lighting on/off
If you switch on the Locator Lighting func-
tion, the exterior lighting is switched on for a
short time when it is dark. The light switch must
be set to Ã; see the vehicle Operator's Man-
ual.
The exterior lighting remains lit for 40 seconds
after the vehicle is unlocked. When you start the
engine, the locator lighting is switched off and
the automatic driving lights are activated.
X
Call up Vehicle Settings (Y page 44).
X
To select Locator Lighting: turn and press
the controller.
X
Press the controller.
The function is switched on or off, depending
on the previous status.
You can find further information on the locator
lighting in the vehicle Operator's Manual.
Activating/deactivating the auto-
matic door locking mechanism
The vehicle is locked automatically when the
ignition is switched on and the vehicle is travel-
ing faster than walking pace.
Vehicle settings
45
Vehicle functions
Z
X
Call up Vehicle Settings (Y page 44).
X
To select Automatic Locking: turn and
press the controller.
The function switches on or off, depending on
the previous setting.
You can find further information on the locking
feature in the vehicle Operator's Manual.
Setting the switch-off delay time
Interior lighting switch-off delay time
The interior lighting is activated for the duration
of the switch-off delay time when the SmartKey
is removed from the ignition lock.
X
Call up Vehicle Settings (Y page 44).
X
To select Interior Lighting Delayed
Switch-off: turn and press the controller.
The setting element is active.
X
To change the delayed switch-off time: turn
and press the controller.
You can find further information on the interior
lighting in the vehicle Operator's Manual.
Exterior lighting switch-off delay time
If you switch on the Exterior Lighting
Delayed Switch-off function, the exterior
lighting is switched on for a short time after the
engine is switched off. The light switch must be
set to Ã; see the vehicle Operator's Manual.
The exterior lighting remains lit for 60 seconds
after the engine is switched off. If you close all
the doors and the tailgate, the exterior lighting
switches off after the set time.
X
Call up Vehicle Settings (Y page 44).
X
To select Exterior Lighting Delayed
Switch-off: turn and press the controller.
The setting element is active.
X
To change the delayed switch-off time: turn
and press the controller.
Activating/deactivating the trunk lid
opening height restriction
Activating the Trunk Opening-height
Restriction function allows you to avoid
bumping the trunk lid on a low garage ceiling, for
example. Setting via the multimedia system is
available for the Sedan and Coupe.
X
Call up Vehicle Settings (Y page 44).
X
To select Trunk Opening-height
Restriction: turn and press the controller.
The function switches on or off, depending on
the previous setting.
360° camera
General notes
The 360° camera covers the immediate sur-
roundings of the vehicle and assists you, for
instance when parking or at exits with reduced
visibility.
The 360° camera is only an aid. It is not a
replacement for your attention to your immedi-
ate surroundings. You are always responsible
for safe maneuvering and parking. Make sure
that no persons or animals are in the maneu-
vering range.
For more information on the 360° camera see
the vehicle Operator's Manual.
Displaying the 360° camera image
The 360° camera image can be displayed if:
R
your vehicle is equipped with a 360° camera
R
the 360° Camera function is switched on (see
the vehicle Operator's Manual)
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To select 360° Camera: turn and press the
controller.
The 360° camera image appears in split-
screen mode.
You will see the previous view on the display if,
when the function is switched on:
R
you turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the
ignition lock
R
you select transmission position j
R
when you are driving at moderate speeds
Switching the display off manually
X
To select &: slide 6 and press the con-
troller.
46
360° camera
Vehicle functions
Switching the display on automatically
X
You can automatically switch the 360° cam-
era display using reverse gear (
Y page 47).
Switching automatic mode of the
360° camera on/off
This function activates the 360° camera when
reverse gear is engaged.
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the
controller.
X
To select System Settings: turn and press
the controller.
X
To select 360° Camera: turn and press the
controller.
The 360° Camera
menu appears.
X
Select Activation by R gear .
The function is switched on O or off ª.
Opening the camera cover for clean-
ing
X
To select Open Camera Cover in the 360°
camera menu: turn the controller and press to
confirm.
The Please Wait...
message appears for
approximately three seconds.
The camera cover opens.
The camera cover closes automatically if:
R
the ignition is switched off
R
the vehicle exceeds a moderate speed
Rear view camera
General notes
The rear view camera covers the immediate sur-
roundings behind the vehicle and assists you
when parking.
The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a
replacement for your attention to your immedi-
ate surroundings. You are always responsible
for safe maneuvering and parking. Make sure
that there are no persons, animals or objects in
the maneuvering area while maneuvering and
parking in parking spaces.
You can find further information about the rear
view camera in the vehicle Operator's Manual.
Switching automatic mode of the rear
view camera on/off
This function activates the rear view camera
when reverse gear is engaged.
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
Slide 6 the controller.
X
To select System Settings: turn and press
the controller.
X
Select Rear View Camera.
X
Select Activation by R gear.
The function is switched on O or off ª,
depending on the previous status.
When you start the vehicle and engage
reverse gear, the camera cover opens auto-
matically if the function is activated. The area
behind the vehicle is shown with guide lines in
the display; see the vehicle Operator's Man-
ual.
For further information on the rear view camera;
see the vehicle Operator's Manual.
Object detection
The rear view camera can detect moving and
stationary objects. If, for example, a pedestrian
or another vehicle is detected, these objects are
marked with bars. The system is able to detect
and mark stationary objects when your vehicle
is moving. Moving objects will always be detec-
ted and marked.
Switching object detection on/off
X
To select Object Detection in the rear view
camera menu: turn and press the controller.
The function is switched on O or off ª,
depending on the previous status.
Rear view camera
47
Vehicle functions
Z
Opening the camera cover for clean-
ing
X
To select Open Camera Cover in the rear
view camera menu: turn and press the con-
troller.
The Please Wait...
message appears for
approximately three seconds.
The camera cover opens.
The camera cover closes automatically if:
R
the ignition is switched off
R
the vehicle pulls away
Climate control settings
Overview
You can adjust the climate control settings
using the climate control bar (
Y page 48) or
the climate control menu (
Y page 49).
Using the climate control bar you can set the
most important climate control functions, for
example:
R
Temperature (Y page 48)
R
Airflow (Y page 48)
R
Air distribution (Y page 48)
You can find all available climate control func-
tions in the climate control menu. You can use
the climate control bar (
Y page 48) to switch
to the climate control menu.
Settings in the climate control bar
Overview
Example
:
Adjusts temperature, air distribution on the
left and airflow and also displays the current
setting
;
Calls up the climate control menu, displays
the current cooling and climate mode set-
ting
=
Adjusts temperature and air distribution on
the right and displays the current setting
Calling up the climate control bar
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
Slide 6 the controller repeatedly until the
climate control bar is activated.
Setting the temperature
X
Call up the climate control bar (Y page 48).
X
To select the current temperature on the left
or right: turn and press the controller.
The temperature setting scale appears.
X
To change the setting: turn the controller.
X
To close the temperature setting scale: press
the controller.
i
You can also use the climate control menu
to set the temperature (
Y page 49).
Setting the air distribution
X
Call up the climate control bar (Y page 48).
X
To select the current air distribution display
on the left or right, e.g. O: turn and press
the controller.
The air distribution setting scale appears.
X
To change the setting: turn the controller.
X
To close the temperature setting scale: press
the controller.
i
You can also use the climate control menu
(
Y page 49) to set the air distribution.
Setting the airflow
X
Call up the climate control bar (Y page 48).
X
To select J: turn and press the controller.
The airflow setting scale appears.
X
To change the setting: turn the controller.
X
To close the temperature setting scale: press
the controller.
i
You can also use the climate control menu
(
Y page 49) to set the airflow.
48
Climate control settings
Vehicle functions
Calling up the climate control menu
Example
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
Slide 6 the controller repeatedly until the
climate control bar is activated.
X
To select from climate control bar ;: turn
and press the controller.
The menu for selecting the climate control
function is activated.
X
To select the climate control function: turn
and press the controller.
The selected climate control function
appears.
Settings in the climate menu
Adjusting the climate mode settings
By setting the climate mode you determine the
type of airflow. The setting is active when the air
conditioning system is set to Ã, see the vehi-
cle Operator's Manual.
X
Call up the climate control menu (Y page 49).
X
To select Climate Mode: turn and press the
controller.
X
To change the setting: turn the controller.
X
To exit the menu: press the % button.
The current airflow setting is shown in the cli-
mate control bar: DIFFUSE
, MEDIUM or FOCUS
(Y page 48).
Starting/stopping the perfume atom-
izer
The perfume atomizer makes it possible to scent
the air in individual compartments in the vehicle
interior. Further information (see the vehicle
Operator's Manual).
X
Call up the climate control menu (Y page 49).
X
To select Air Freshener: turn and press the
controller.
The setting element is active.
X
To start/stop the perfume atomizer: press
the controller.
X
To set the intensity: turn the controller when
the atomizer is switched on.
X
To exit the menu: press the % button.
Switching ionization on/off
The ionization has a cleansing effect on the air in
the vehicle interior. Further information (see the
vehicle Operator's Manual).
X
Call up the climate control menu (Y page 49).
X
To select Ionization: turn and press the
controller.
The setting element is active.
X
To switch the ionization on or off: turn the
controller.
X
To exit the menu: press the % button.
Pre-entry climate control via SmartKey
This function is available for plug-in hybrid vehi-
cles.
Before getting in, the driver's seat area or the
whole interior can be briefly warmed or ventila-
ted in advance with the air from the air vents
being pre-cooled.
X
Call up the climate control menu (Y page 49).
X
To select Pre-entry Climate Control
via Key: turn and press the controller.
X
To switch on or off: turn the controller.
X
To exit the menu: press the % button.
Further information on pre-entry climate con-
trol; see the vehicle Operator's Manual.
Pre-entry climate control at time of
departure
This function is available for plug-in hybrid vehi-
cles.
You can climatize the driver's seat and the vehi-
cle interior in time for the departure time set.
Climate control settings
49
Vehicle functions
Z
X
Call up the climate control menu (Y page 49).
X
To select Pre-entry Climate Ctrl. at
Departure Time: turn and press the control-
ler.
A rotary menu appears.
X
To select the setting: turn the controller.
The menu symbol, text and image show the
selected setting.
X
To exit the menu: press the % button.
Settings in the bottom bar of the cli-
mate control menu
Activating/deactivating climate con-
trol
This setting is made in the bottom bar of the
climate control menu.
X
Call up the climate control menu (Y page 49).
X
Slide 6 the controller repeatedly until the
bottom bar is activated.
X
To select O Climate Ctrl On: turn and
press the controller.
The climate control is switched on O or off
ª depending on the settings.
If the climate control is switched off:
R
the climate control setting functions are
deactivated.
R
the blower is switched off.
R
the air recirculation flaps are closed.
Switching cooling with air dehumidifi-
cation on/off
This setting is made in the bottom bar of the
climate control menu.
X
Call up the climate control menu (Y page 49).
X
Slide 6 the controller repeatedly until the
bottom bar is activated.
X
To select O A/C: turn and press the control-
ler.
X
Switch cooling with air dehumidification on
O or off ª.
i
The current status of the cooling function is
displayed in the climate control bar: A/C ON
activated, A/C OFF deactivated
(
Y page 48).
i
Deactivating the cooling with air dehumidi-
fication function reduces fuel consumption.
Synchronizing the climate control set-
tings
Use O Sync (synchronization) to select the cli-
mate control setting for all zones together O or
separately ª.
This setting is made in the bottom bar of the
climate control menu.
X
Call up the climate control menu (Y page 49).
X
Slide 6 the controller repeatedly until the
bottom bar is activated.
X
To select O Sync: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Switch the synchronization function on O or
off ª.
For further information on synchronizing climate
control settings (see the vehicle Operator's
Manual).
DYNAMIC SELECT
General notes
You can use DYNAMIC SELECT to configure the
following settings for the Individual drive pro-
gram:
R
Drive system
R
Suspension
R
Steering
R
Climate control
R
ECO start/stop function
In addition, current vehicle and engine data is
visualized via the two further Vehicle
Data and
Engine Data
menus.
i
In a few countries, the ECO start/stop func-
tion is deactivated at the factory due to the
available fuel grade. In this case, the ECO
start/stop function is not available regardless
of the display in the multimedia system dis-
play.
The ECO Assist setting is available on
PLUGIN HYBRID vehicles.
In Mercedes-AMG vehicles, you can use
DYNAMIC
SELECT to configure the following set-
tings for the Individual drive program:
R
Drive system
R
Suspension
50
DYNAMIC SELECT
Vehicle functions
R
Transmission
R
Sports exhaust system
R
Electronic Stability Program ESP
®
There may be fewer settings or set values, or
none, depending on your vehicle's equipment.
For further information on the Individual drive
program; see the vehicle Operator's Manual.
Configuration via the DYNAMIC
SELECT switch
X
Use the DYNAMIC SELECT switch to select
the Individual drive program; see the vehicle
Operator's Manual.
A window appears after a short while.
X
To confirm Adjust: press the controller.
The Individual Configuration
menu for
setting the drive program appears.
X
To select Drive, Suspension, Steering,
Climate Control
or Eco Start/Stop
Function: turn and press the controller.
X
Select individual settings.
The menu symbol, text and image show the
selected setting.
In Mercedes-AMG vehicles, you can configure
the settings of the drive system, suspension,
transmission, sports exhaust system and Elec-
tronic Stability Program ESP
®
.
Displaying vehicle data
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To select DYNAMIC SELECT: turn and press
the controller.
The Individual
Configuration, Vehicle
Data and Engine Data menus appear.
X
Select Vehicle Data.
Updates of the following data are displayed:
R
Road type analogous to the selected drive
program
R
G-force display of longitudinal and lateral
acceleration
R
Accelerator and brake pedal activity
R
Activity of the suspension struts
R
Wheel angle
R
Overrun mode animation
The G-force display is not available in all of the
drive programs.
Daytime or night-time view is shown depending
on the automatic light sensor.
Displaying engine data
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To select DYNAMIC SELECT: turn and press
the controller.
The Individual
Configuration, Vehicle
Data and Engine Data menus appear.
X
Select Engine Data.
The following current data is displayed:
R
Engine output
R
Engine torque
R
Engine oil temperature
R
On-board electrical system voltage
i
The values for engine output and engine tor-
que may deviate from the nominal values.
Items that can influence this are, for example:
R
Engine speed
R
Sea level
R
Fuel grade
R
Outside temperature
In Mercedes-AMG vehicles you will see current
data on the transmission oil temperature
instead of the on-board electrical system volt-
age.
Setting options
You can choose from the following settings for
the drive:
C Comfort
S Sport
S+ Sport +
M Manual
E Eco
DYNAMIC SELECT
51
Vehicle functions
Z
You can make the following settings for the sus-
pension:
C Comfort
S Sport
S+ Sport +
You can make the following settings for the
steering:
C Comfort
S Sport
You can choose from the following settings for
climate control:
E Eco
C Comfort
You can choose from the following settings for
the ECO start/stop function:
On Switches the ECO
start/stop function
on
Off Switches the ECO
start/stop function
off
You can make the following settings for ECO
Assist (PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles):
On Switches ECO Assist
on
Off Switches ECO Assist
off
Setting options for Mercedes-AMG
vehicles
You can choose from the following settings for
the drive:
R Race
C Comfort
S Sport
S+ Sport +
You can make the following settings for the sus-
pension:
C Comfort
S Sport
S+ Sport +
You can choose from the following settings for
the transmission:
D Automatic
M Manual
You can make the following settings for the
sports exhaust system:
C Comfort
S+ Sport +
You can choose from the following settings for
the Electronic Stability Program ESP
®
:
S Sport
On Activates the Electronic Sta-
bility Program ESP
®
For further information on the Individual drive
program; see the vehicle Operator's Manual.
52
DYNAMIC SELECT
Vehicle functions
Your multimedia system equipment
These operating instructions describe all the
standard and optional equipment of your multi-
media system, as available at the time of going
to press. Country-specific differences are pos-
sible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not
feature all functions described here. This also
applies to safety-relevant systems and func-
tions.
Read the information on qualified specialist
workshops in the vehicle Operator's Manual.
Introduction
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you operate information systems and com-
munication equipment integrated in the vehi-
cle when driving, you may be distracted from
the traffic situation. You could also lose con-
trol of the vehicle. There is a risk of an acci-
dent.
Only operate this equipment when the traffic
situation permits. If you are not sure that this
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention
to traffic conditions and operate the equip-
ment when the vehicle is stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating the multimedia system.
The multimedia system calculates the route to
the destination without taking the following into
account, for example:
R
traffic lights
R
stop and yield signs
R
merging lanes
R
parking or stopping in a no parking/no stop-
ping zone
R
other road and traffic rules and regulations
R
narrow bridges
The multimedia system may give incorrect nav-
igation commands if the actual street/traffic
situation does not correspond with the digital
map's data. For example, a route may have bee
n
d
iverted or the direction of a one-way street may
have changed.
For this reason, you must always observe road
and traffic rules and regulations during your
journey. Road and traffic rules and regulations
always have priority over the system's driving
recommendations.
Navigation announcements are intended to
direct you while driving without diverting your
attention from the road and driving.
Please always use this feature instead of con-
sulting the map display for directions. Looking
at the icons or map display can distract you from
traffic conditions and driving, and increase the
risk of an accident.
General notes
Operational readiness of the navigation
system
The navigation system must determine the posi-
tion of the vehicle before first use or whenever
operational status is restored. Therefore, you
may have to drive for a while before precise
route guidance is possible.
GPS reception
Among other things, correct functioning of the
navigation system depends on GPS reception. In
certain situations, GPS reception may be
impaired, there may be interference or there
may be no reception at all, e.g. in tunnels or
parking garages.
i
Using roof carriers may impair the correct
functioning of a roof antenna (phone, satellite
radio, GPS).
Entry restriction
For vehicles in certain countries, there is a data
entry restriction.
The restriction is active above a vehicle speed of
about 3 mph (5 km/h). The restriction is deac-
tivated as soon as the vehicle speed drops
below about 2 mph (3 km/h).
When the restriction is active, certain entries
cannot be made. Menu items are shown in gray
and cannot be selected.
For example:
R
entering the destination city and street
R
entering a destination via the map
Introduction
53
Navigation
Z
R
entering POIs in the vicinity of a city or via a
name search
R
editing entries
Other entries are possible, such as entering
points of interest in the vicinity of the destina-
tion or current position.
Switching to navigation mode
:
Traffic reports can be received or traffic
reports are available
X
Press the ß button.
If route guidance is active, the map is shown
in full-screen mode. The map shows the vehi-
cle's current position.
If no route guidance is active, the menu is also
displayed. Destination
is highlighted.
Access from one of the other main functions:
X
To activate the menu: slide 5 the con-
troller (e.g. in radio mode).
X
To select Navi: turn and press the controller.
The navigation menu appears.
X
Press the controller.
The map shows the vehicle's current position.
Access within navigation:
X
From any menu, press the ß button.
The navigation menu appears.
X
Press the controller.
Showing/hiding the menu
Using the menu, you can make a destination
entry or select the navigation settings, for exam-
ple.
X
To show: slide 6 the controller when the
map appears.
or
X
Swipe down the touchpad with one finger.
If there has been no route calculated, Des‐
tination is marked.
If a route has been calculated, y is
marked.
X
To hide: press the % button.
or
X
Slide 5 the controller.
Full screen symbol : appears.
X
Press the controller.
Moving the map
Requirement: the map is in full screen mode, the
menu is faded out (
Y page 54).
X
Press the controller.
The crosshair is shown.
X
Slide 1, 4 or 2 the controller.
The map moves in the corresponding direc-
tion under the crosshair.
i
Enter a destination using the map
(
Y page 64).
54
Introduction
Navigation
Basic settings
Selecting the route type
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Route Settings.
X
Select a route type.
A filled circle indicates the current selection.
R
Active route guidance: the multimedia sys-
tem calculates a new route.
R
Inactive route guidance: the multimedia
system uses the selection as the new set-
ting.
i
Route guidance active: a destination has
been entered and the route has been calcu-
lated.
Route guidance inactive: no destination has
been entered yet and no route has been cal-
culated yet.
Fast Route
The multimedia system cal-
culates a route with a short
travel time.
Dynamic
Traffic
Route
Based on the Fast Route
route type and includes traf-
fic reports on the route for the
route guidance.
Eco Route
The multimedia system cal-
culates an economical route.
The journey may take slightly
longer compared to taking
the fast route.
Short
Route
The multimedia system cal-
culates a short distance
route.
The Dynamic Traffic Route route type uses
real-time traffic reports from SIRIUS satellite
radio.
Further Information on real-time traffic reports
(
Y page 77).
X
To calculate alternative routes: select
Calculate Alternative Routes
.
Switch the function on O or off ª.
Function activated: after each route calcula-
tion, route alternatives are offered that cor-
respond to the local conditions (
Y page 75).
If desired, you can have the multimedia sys-
tem calculate alternative routes even during
route guidance (
Y page 75).
Setting route options
X
To avoid/use route options: select Avoid
Options.
A menu appears.
X
Select one of the options.
O: using or avoiding route options is enabled
ª: using or avoiding route options is disabled
R
Menu item Avoid Area (Y page 85)
The multimedia system enables you to avoid
areas you do not wish to drive through.
R
Menu item Avoid Highways
R
Menu item Avoid Ferries
R
Menu item Avoid Auto Trains
R
Menu item Avoid Tunnels
R
Menu item Avoid Unpaved Roads
The function is not available in all countries.
R
Menu item Use Toll Roads
The route calculation includes roads which
require you to pay a usage fee (toll).
R
Menu item Use Carpool Lanes
If your vehicle meets the access conditions
for carpool lanes, you can use this function.
Basic settings
55
Navigation
Z
Navigation includes carpool lanes if the car-
pool lanes option is activated.
Depending on local conditions, the multimedia
system may not always be able to include all
route options. A route may include a ferry, for
instance, even though Avoid Ferries
is ena-
bled. The multimedia system will notify you of
this visually and through a navigation message.
X
To use toll roads: turn and press the con-
troller.
A menu appears.
X
Select an option.
The options include using roads that require
cash payment or electronic billing, or switch-
ing off the function.
X
To exit a menu: slide 8 the controller.
Selecting announcements
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Settings.
X
Select an option.
Switch the option on O or off ª.
Announce
Street
Names
The multimedia system
announces the names of the
roads onto which the upcom-
ing change of direction leads.
The function is not available in
all countries.
Audio
Fadeout
The volume of an active media
source is automatically
reduced during a navigation
announcement.
Gas on
Reserve
Function activated: once the
reserve fuel tank level is
reached, a message appears to
help you start a gas station
search.
Atten‐
tion
Assist
Function activated: if ATTEN-
TION ASSIST displays a warn-
ing in the multifunction display,
a message appears in the mul-
timedia system display when
you drive onto a highway. This
can help you start a rest stop
search.
For further information on
ATTENTION ASSIST, see the
vehicle Operator's Manual.
Using car pool lanes
You can include carpool lanes (HOV or car shar-
ing lanes) in the route calculation.
If you use HOV or carpool lanes, please observe
the applicable laws as well as the local and time
limitation conditions.
Carpool lanes may only be used under certain
conditions. They can normally be used when
there are two people in the vehicle. However,
there are also carpool lanes which can only be
used when there are three or more people in the
vehicle. If the vehicle's emission or consump-
tion values are below the prescribed levels, lone
drivers may also use the carpool lanes in Cali-
fornia.
Carpool lanes may be reserved for specific
times (e.g. during the peak period).
Carpool lanes are indicated by a diamond sym-
bol on specific road signs and on the road sur-
face. The road signs may also include the des-
ignation CARPOOL. The lanes are arranged as a
separate lane next to the others or are built as a
physically separate lane.
Depending on the setting under Use Carpool
Lanes, the multimedia system uses carpool
lanes when calculating the route. During route
guidance, visual and audible driving directions
provide guidance into and out of carpool lanes.
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
56
Basic settings
Navigation
X
Select Route Settings.
X
Select Avoid Options.
X
Select Use Carpool Lanes.
Carpool lanes will either be used O or avoi-
ded ª when calculating the route.
Destination entry
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you operate information systems and com-
munication equipment integrated in the vehi-
cle when driving, you may be distracted from
the traffic situation. You could also lose con-
trol of the vehicle. There is a risk of an acci-
dent.
Only operate this equipment when the traffic
situation permits. If you are not sure that this
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention
to traffic conditions and operate the equip-
ment when the vehicle is stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating the multimedia system.
Destination entry may be blocked while driving,
depending on the country specifications.
General notes
The various character entry options are descri-
bed for the controller. Alternatively you can use
the touchpad to enter characters and select
menus (
Y page 23).
Using an address
Calling up the address entry menu
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Destination: turn and press the
controller.
X
Select Address Entry.
Address entry options
Examples of how you can enter an address:
R
City or ZIP code, street, house number
R
City or ZIP code, street
R
City or ZIP code, center
R
City or ZIP code, street, intersection
R
Street, city or ZIP code, house number
R
Street, city or ZIP code, intersection
The address can be entered faster by entering
the street before the city if the address has an
unusual street name.
While entering an address, you can also switch
to other destination entry options:
R
Keyword search (Y page 59)
R
Map (Y page 64)
R
POI (Y page 61)
Entering an address
The example shows you how to enter a city,
street and house number for an address, e.g. for
your home address.
X
Call up the address entry menu (Y page 57).
X
To select Street: turn and press the control-
ler.
X
Enter BROADWAY. Character entry (Y page 31).
Destination entry
57
Navigation
Z
X
To call up the list: slide 5 the controller
repeatedly until the character bar disappears.
or
X
To select OK, turn and press the controller.
X
To select Town: press the controller.
X
Enter the city, e.g. New York. Then call up the
list and select an entry. Proceed in the same
way as when entering a street.
X
To select No.: press the controller.
X
Enter the house number.
X
Confirm the entry.
The address entry menu shows the address.
The city in which the vehicle is currently located
(current vehicle position) is at the top of the list
of cities. When entering an address as the des-
tination, the locations for which route guidance
has already been carried out are more promi-
nently available.
You can enter any of the cities, streets, ZIP
codes, etc. which are stored in the digital map.
State/province and city are sufficient to start
navigating. You can enter either a city or a ZIP
code. The street and house number complete
the destination address.
Entering additional address data
You can enter additional address data:
R
State/province
You can use Last Used
to select the last
selected state (USA) or the last selected prov-
ince (Canada). You can also select Mexico
and The Bahamas.
R
ZIP code
Entering a ZIP code will delete a previously
entered city.
R
Center
Entering a center will delete a previously
entered street.
R
Intersection
Entering an intersection will delete a previ-
ously entered house number.
X
Call up the address entry menu (Y page 57).
X
To select State/Province, ZIP Code, Cen‐
ter or Intersection: turn, slide 6 and
press the controller.
X
Enter and select the address element.
Saving an address
You can store the address entered as:
R
a home address in the address book
R
a navigable address book contact
For further information on the address book,
see (
Y page 104)
R
a personal destination on the SD card
(
Y page 81)
X
Call up the address entry menu (Y page 57).
X
To select Save: slide 6, turn and press the
controller.
X
As the home address: select As "My
Address".
The home address is stored in the list of con-
tacts under the entry My Address
.
X
As a contact: select As New Contact.
X
Select Not Classified, Home or Work.
X
Enter a surname and first name (Y page 30).
X
To select OK: turn and press the controller.
The destination address is saved in the
address book as a navigable contact.
58
Destination entry
Navigation
Starting route calculation
:
To view the vicinity of the destination
The entered destination appears in the address
entry menu.
X
To confirm Start or Continue: press the
controller.
If you select Start
: the route is calculated
with the current route settings (
Y page 55).
While route calculation is in progress, an
arrow will indicate the direction to your des-
tination. Route guidance begins once a route
has been calculated. If the vehicle is traveling
on a non-digitized road, the system displays
the linear distance to the destination, the
direction to the destination and the Road
Not Mapped message.
Selection Continue
: if Calculate Alter‐
native Routes is activated, alternative
routes are calculated. These can be displayed
and selected for route guidance
(
Y page 75).
If route guidance has already been activated,
a prompt will appear asking whether you wish
to end the current route guidance.
X
To select Yes or Set as Intermediate
Destination: turn and press the controller.
Yes
cancels the current route guidance and
starts route calculation to the new destina-
tion.
Set as Intermediate Destination
adds
the new destination in addition to the existing
destination and opens the intermediate des-
tinations list.
i
The route is calculated using the digital map
data. The calculation time depends on the
distance from the destination, for example.
The calculated route may differ from the ideal
route, e.g. due to roadworks or incomplete
map data. Please also refer to the notes about
the digital map (
Y page 86).
X
To call up the keyword search: select è
by sliding 6, turning and pressing the con-
troller in the address entry menu.
X
To view the vicinity of the destination: to
select :, turn and press the controller.
You can explore the destination area.
Requirement for exploring a destination
(USA): mbrace must be activated for Internet
access (
Y page 120).
Requirement for exploring a destination (Can-
ada): a mobile phone is connected to the mul-
timedia system via Bluetooth
®
(Y page 92)
or USB (
Y page 153).
Keyword search
Entering keywords
The keyword search is used to help find desti-
nations using fragments of words. The keyword
search is tolerant of errors.
It can be used for an address or a POI. For exam-
ple, you can search for the Empire State Building
in New York.
The keyword search finds geographically toler-
ant hits. If, for example, you are searching for a
street located on the edge of a major city, the
search will also cover adjacent smaller cities.
The keyword search supports languages using
Latin characters.
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Destination: turn and press the
controller.
X
Select Keyword Search.
X
Enter the first few letters of the city and
street, e.g. NEW
and EMP.
While entering the information, the number of
exact matches/all hits is shown.
Destination entry
59
Navigation
Z
---/--- is displayed if fewer than three char-
acters have been entered.
999+
is displayed if there are too many hits.
X
Select the ¬ symbol.
The search results are displayed
(
Y page 60).
Selecting search results
The search results are divided into categories,
such as addresses. The number of exact/total
hits is shown in brackets.
Further search results are displayed, if POI
Search and/or Fuzzy Search are activated in
the search options (
Y page 60).
X
To select Addresses : press the controller.
The search results are displayed.
Exact hits are shown at the very top of the list.
Hits are listed alphabetically. The search term
that you entered is highlighted in orange in the
entries.
X
Select an entry: turn and press the controller.
The address entry menu appears, showing the
destination address.
X
To start route calculation: select Start.
X
To select a POI: select POIs in the Vicin‐
ity or All POIs by turning and pressing the
controller.
A list appears. The search results are dis-
played according to the linear distance, start-
ing with those closest.
X
Select a POI.
The POI is shown.
X
To start route calculation: select Start.
X
To use online search: select Online
Search by turning and pressing the control-
ler.
The search switches to the online functions.
Online search requirement (USA): mbrace
must be activated for Internet access
(
Y page 120).
Requirement for the online map display (Can-
ada): a mobile phone is connected to the mul-
timedia system via Bluetooth
®
(Y page 92)
or USB (
Y page 153).
Selecting search options
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Destination: turn and press the
controller.
X
Select Keyword Search.
X
To select Search Options: slide 5, turn
and press the controller.
X
Select Fuzzy Search or POI Search.
Switch the setting on O or off ª.
The error-tolerant search is useful if parts of
the address are incomplete or the spelling is
unclear.
The POI search takes into account points of
interest in the search.
Selecting a state/province
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Destination: turn and press the
controller.
X
Select Keyword Search.
60
Destination entry
Navigation
X
To select State/Province: slide 5, turn
and press the controller.
States/provinces are sorted alphabetically.
X
To select a state/province: turn and press the
controller.
Using online search
Requirement (USA): mbrace must be activated
for Internet access (
Y page 120).
Requirement (Canada): a mobile phone is con-
nected to the multimedia system via Bluetooth
®
(Y page 92) or USB (Y page 153).
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Destination: turn and press the
controller.
X
Select Keyword Search.
X
To select Online Search: slide 5, turn and
press the controller.
The search switches to the online functions.
Selecting a destination from the list of
last destinations
The last 50 destinations are stored automati-
cally.
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Destination: turn and press the
controller.
X
Select From Previous Destinations.
X
Select the destination.
The address entry menu appears, showing the
destination address.
X
To start route calculation: select Start.
Selecting an address book contact as
a destination
You can select navigable address book contacts
as the destination. These are identified by the
L symbol. If you have already entered and
saved your home address, you can select this as
the destination by using My Address
.
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Destination: turn and press the
controller.
X
Select From Contacts.
X
Select the destination.
The address entry menu appears, showing the
contact and associated destination address.
X
To start route calculation: select Start.
Selecting a destination from POIs
Calling up the POI menu
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Destination: turn and press the
controller.
X
Select From POIs.
Destination entry
61
Navigation
Z
Selecting a POI category
X
Select a category or one of the searches listed in the table.
The G symbol after an entry shows that further categories are available.
X
Select a sub-category.
The search for POIs starts.
If route guidance is active, first define the position for the POI search (
Y page 62).
If no route guidance is active, the POI search covers a 240 mile (400 km) radius around the current
vehicle position.
Once the search is completed, the POI list is displayed.
The search results display the following information:
R
an arrow that shows the linear direction to the POI (search around vehicle position)
R
the linear distance to the POI
R
the name of the POI
X
Select a point of interest (Y page 63).
The complete address of the POI is shown.
Selection Instructions
Search By Name
The search looks for all
POIs on the digital map or
around one of the three
previously specified posi-
tions (
Y page 62).
X
To select Search By Name: turn and press the controller.
X
Select All POIs or a position for the POI search.
The search for POIs starts.
Search By Phone Num‐
ber
All POIs with a telephone
number can be selected.
X
To select Search By Phone Number: turn and press the control-
ler.
The search for POIs starts.
Defining the position for the POI search
The POI search covers a 240 mi (400 km) radius around the selected position.
62
Destination entry
Navigation
Selection Instructions
Near Destination
The search is performed
in the vicinity of the desti-
nation.
X
Select a category or Search By Name (Y page 62).
X
Select Near Destination.
The search for POIs starts.
Current Position
Searches in the vicinity of
the current vehicle posi-
tion.
X
Select a category or Search By Name (Y page 62).
X
Select Current Position.
The search for POIs starts.
Other City
After entering a city, the
search is performed
within the city's bounda-
ries
Option 1
X
Call up the POI menu (Y page 61).
X
To select Other City: turn and press the controller.
X
Select the state/province (Y page 58), if desired.
X
Enter the city (Y page 57).
X
Select a POI category (Y page 62).
Option 2
X
Enter a city in the address entry menu (Y page 57).
X
To select POIs: slide 6, turn and press the controller.
X
Select a POI category (Y page 62).
Selecting a POI
Requirement for "Calling up a POI": a mobile
phone must be connected to the multimedia
system (
Y page 92).
Requirements for "Viewing the vicinity of the
destination" and "Loading data from the Inter-
net" (USA): mbrace must be activated for Inter-
net access (
Y page 120).
Requirements for "Viewing the vicinity of the
destination" and "Loading data from the Inter-
net" (Canada): a mobile phone must be connec-
ted to the multimedia system via Bluetooth
®
(Y page 92) or USB (Y page 153).
The complete address of the POI is shown.
X
To view the vicinity of the destination:
select : by turning and pressing the con-
troller.
If street images are available, the street in the
vicinity of the destination address is shown.
X
To call up the map: select Map.
X
Move the map, change the map scale
(
Y page 64) and select the POI.
3D POIs can be displayed in an all-round view
(
Y page 64)
X
To call up a POI: select Call.
If a phone number is available, the multimedia
system switches to the telephone function.
X
To load data from the Internet: select www.
If an Internet address is available, data is loa-
ded from the Internet.
X
To store a POI: select Save.
The POI can be saved as:
R
home address
R
a navigable address book contact
(
Y page 104)
R
a personal destination on the SD card
(
Y page 81)
X
To start route calculation: select Start or
Continue
by turning and pressing the con-
troller.
Destination entry
63
Navigation
Z
If Calculate Alternative Routes is acti-
vated (
Y page 55), Continue is available.
Rotating a 3D POI
Realistically modeled buildings are shown on
the map in an all-round view. These 3D POIs are
sights or buildings of regional importance, e.g. a
main railway station.
3D POIs can be rotated in map scales 1/32 mi,
1/16 mi and 1/8 mi.
To aid orientation, the points of the compass are
shown while turning.
X
Select a point of interest (Y page 63).
X
To select Map: turn and press the controller.
X
Select a 3D POI from the map using Previous
or Next.
If the 3D POI is marked in gold, you can select
3D
.
X
Select 3D.
The 3D POI turns on its own axis.
X
To exit the all-round view, press the control-
ler.
Using the map
:
Crosshair
;
Distance of crosshair position from current
vehicle position
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Destination: turn and press the
controller.
X
Select Using Map.
The map with crosshair is shown.
X
To move the map: slide 1, 4 or 2
the controller.
X
To change the map scale: turn the controller
until the desired map scale is selected.
The scale is displayed at the bottom.
To enlarge the map: turn the controller coun-
ter-clockwise.
To zoom the map out: turn the controller
clockwise.
X
To select a destination: press the controller.
X
To select a destination from the selection list:
turn and press the controller.
If the digital map provides navigable address
data, you will see the destination address in
the address entry menu.
X
To start route calculation: select Start.
Entering intermediate destinations
Introduction
You can also map the route to the destination
yourself by entering up to four intermediate des-
tinations. The sequence of the intermediate des-
tinations can be changed at any time.
The multimedia system provides a selection of
predefined destinations in eight categories for
this purpose, such as Gas Station
. You can
also use the destination entry options to enter
intermediate destinations.
Creating intermediate destinations
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Destination: turn and press the
controller.
X
Select Intermediate Destinations.
X
To select a POI category or Other: turn and
press the controller.
After selecting one of the eight POI catego-
ries, available POIs are displayed:
R
along the route
R
in the vicinity
The multimedia system first searches for des-
tinations on the route. The search for desti-
nations is then initiated in the area around the
current vehicle position.
X
After selecting Other, select one of the des-
tination entry options.
64
Destination entry
Navigation
Selection Step
Address Entry
X
Enter a destination by
address (
Y page 57).
Keyword
Search
X
Select a destination
using a keyword search
(
Y page 59).
From Previ‐
ous Destina‐
tions
X
Select a destination
from the list of last des-
tinations (
Y page 61).
From Con‐
tacts
X
Select a contact from
the address book as the
destination (
Y page 61).
From POIs
X
Select a point of interest
(
Y page 63).
Using Map
X
Enter a destination using
the map (
Y page 64).
From Memory
Card
X
Select a personal POI
(
Y page 69).
From
Mercedes-
Benz Apps
X
Enter a destination from
Mercedes-Benz Apps
(
Y page 66).
Using Geo-
Coordinates
X
Enter a destination using
the geo-coordinates
(
Y page 67).
X
To select a POI: turn the controller and press
to confirm.
After selecting a POI or entering a destination,
the address of the intermediate destination is
displayed.
After the destination is entered via the map,
the address is displayed.
X
To call up a map: select Map by turning and
pressing the controller.
You can move the map and select the desti-
nation.
X
To make a call: select Call.
If the intermediate destination has a tele-
phone number and a mobile phone is con-
nected to the multimedia system
(
Y page 92), the call is connected.
X
To load data from the Internet: select www.
If an Internet address is available, data is loa-
ded from the Internet.
X
To store an intermediate destination in
the destination memory: select Save
(Y page 80).
X
To accept an intermediate destination:
select OK
by pressing the controller.
The destination is entered in the intermediate
destinations menu.
X
To enter another intermediate destina-
tion: slide 5 the controller and highlight
Add New:
.
X
Press the controller.
X
Proceed as described above.
Editing intermediate destinations
You can perform the following functions:
R
change intermediate destinations
R
switch the sequence of the intermediate des-
tinations in the intermediate destinations
menu
R
delete intermediate destinations
i
You cannot edit POIs.
Destination entry
65
Navigation
Z
X
To select an intermediate destination in the
intermediate destinations menu: turn and
press the controller.
A menu appears.
X
To change an intermediate destination:
select Edit
in the menu.
X
Change the address, e.g. the city and street.
X
To select OK: turn and press the controller.
The intermediate destinations menu appears
and displays the changed intermediate desti-
nation.
You can enter the intermediate destinations and
the destination in any order. To change the
order, at least one intermediate destination and
the destination must be entered.
X
To change the order: in the menu, select
Move
.
X
Turn the controller and move the intermediate
destination or destination to the desired posi-
tion.
X
Press the controller.
X
To delete an intermediate destination:
select Delete
in the menu.
Accepting intermediate destinations
for the route
X
To select Start Route Guidance in the
intermediate destinations menu: press the
controller.
The route is calculated with the entered inter-
mediate destinations.
If an intermediate destination was passed
during route guidance, a green tick mark will
be entered in the intermediate destinations
menu. Once the route has been recalculated,
the intermediate destination is deleted from
the intermediate destinations menu.
Saving as a personal route
You can save a route including intermediate
destinations on the SD card.
Requirements: the SD card has the FAT data
system format (e.g. FAT32).
X
Insert the SD memory card (Y page 141).
X
To select Save As Personal Route in the
intermediate destinations menu: press the
controller.
An input field appears.
X
Enter a file name in the input field. Press OK to
confirm.
The route is saved to the SD memory card.
Searching for a gas station when the
fuel level is low
Requirement: the setting Gas on Reservemust
be enabled (
Y page 56).
If the fuel tank reserve level is displayed, you will
see the Reserve Fuel Would you like to
start a search for surrounding gas
stations? message.
X
To select Yes or No: turn and press the con-
troller.
If you select Yes
: the gas station search
starts. When the search is complete, a list of
the gas stations available along the route or in
the vicinity is displayed.
If you select No
: the search is canceled.
X
Select the gas station.
The address of the gas station is displayed.
X
To select Start: press the controller.
The selected gas station is entered into posi-
tion 1 of the intermediate destinations menu.
Route guidance begins.
If the intermediate destinations menu already
contains four intermediate destinations, a
prompt will be displayed, asking you whether
you wish to enter the gas station into position
1. If you select Yes
, the gas station is trans-
ferred into the list and intermediate destina-
tion 4 is deleted.
Entering a destination from
Mercedes-Benz Apps
Requirement (USA): mbrace is activated for the
Mercedes-Benz Apps (
Y page 120).
Requirement (Canada): a mobile phone is con-
nected to the multimedia system via Bluetooth
®
(Y page 92) or USB (Y page 153).
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
66
Destination entry
Navigation
X
To select Destination: turn and press the
controller.
X
Select From Mercedes-Benz Apps.
The list of Mercedes-Benz Apps appears.
Using geo-coordinates
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Destination: turn and press the
controller.
X
Select Using Geo-Coordinates.
Geo-coordinates (longitude and latitude) are
entered in degrees, minutes and seconds.
X
To enter geo-coordinates: turn the control-
ler.
The value for degree, minute or second
changes.
X
To move the selection within the line: slide
1 the controller.
X
To move the selection between lines: slide
4 the controller.
X
To confirm the value: press the controller.
X
To store geo-coordinates: select Save by
turning and pressing the controller.
The destination with the geo-coordinates can
be saved as:
R
a home address in the address book
R
a navigable address book contact
For further information on the address
book, see (
Y page 104)
R
a personal destination on the SD card
(
Y page 81)
X
To start route calculation: select Start
Route Guidance by turning and pressing the
controller.
Personal POIs and routes
General notes
The use of personal POIs for displaying traffic
surveillance equipment is not permitted in every
country. Please observe the country-specific
regulations and always drive at a suitable speed.
Personal POIs are filed in categories:
R
Not Classified
Standard entry for personal POIs
R
Mercedes-Benz Apps
Personal POIs (destinations, routes) that you
have imported via the online functions.
R
Categories which you have created yourself,
e.g. on your PC
Personal routes are not categorized.
Settings for personal POIs
Displaying on the map
Requirements: an SD card with personal POIs is
inserted (
Y page 141).
The SD card has the FAT data system format
(e.g. FAT32).
All personal POIs of the selected category are
displayed on the map with a corresponding sym-
bol.
If the "Alert when approaching" function is acti-
vated (
Y page 68), the symbols are displayed
up to a map scale of 2 mi.
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Personal POIs.
X
Select Display on the Map.
The menu displays the categories available on
the SD card.
X
To select a category: turn and press the
controller.
All personal POIs in the selected category are
displayed O or not displayed ª, depending
on the previous status.
Personal POIs and routes
67
Navigation
Z
Alert when approaching
Requirements: an SD card with personal POIs is
inserted (
Y page 141).
The SD card has the FAT data system format
(e.g. FAT32).
If the vehicle is approaching a personal POI, this
is highlighted on the map and/or an audible sig-
nal sounds.
For this purpose, both the corresponding func-
tion Approaching POI Cue
and the category
containing the personal POI must be activated.
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Personal POIs.
X
Select Approaching POI Cue.
The menu displays the categories available on
the SD card.
X
Select Audible or Optical.
The function is switched on O or off ª,
depending on the previous status.
X
To select a category: turn and press the
controller.
The function is switched on O or off ª, for
all personal POIs of this category, depending
on the previous setting.
Saving personal POIs and routes
General notes
Personal POIs and routes are geodata which are
saved in open GPX format (GPS Exchange for-
mat) on the SD card.
Requirements: the SD card has the FAT data
system format (e.g. FAT32).
Personal POI from current vehicle posi-
tion or crosshair position
X
Insert the SD memory card (Y page 141).
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
When the map is displayed, press the con-
troller until a message appears.
The current vehicle position is saved to the
Not Classified
category on the SD card
and also stored in the "Last destinations"
memory (
Y page 81).
If the "Move map" function is selected
(
Y page 54), the crosshair position is saved.
i
If no SD card is inserted, the personal POI
will only be stored in the "Last destinations"
memory.
Personal POI from destination address
X
Insert the SD memory card (Y page 141).
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
Call up the address entry menu and enter the
destination address (
Y page 57).
X
To select Save, slide 6 the controller.
X
Turn and press the controller.
X
To make a selection, turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Enter the name.
X
Select a category.
The current address is saved as a personal
POI on the SD card.
i
You can select a destination from the From
Previous Destinations or From Contacts
memories and save it on the SD card.
R
From Previous Destinations
(Y page 61)
R
From Contacts (Y page 61)
Personal route from a tour including
intermediate destinations
X
Insert the SD memory card (Y page 141).
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
Enter a destination, e.g. by address
(
Y page 57).
X
Start route calculation (Y page 59).
68
Personal POIs and routes
Navigation
X
Enter an intermediate destination
(
Y page 64).
X
Select Save As Personal Route in the
intermediate destinations menu.
The route is saved in the Personal Routes
folder on the SD card.
Importing personal destinations and
routes via Mercedes-Benz Apps
You can import destinations and routes into the
navigation via the Mercedes-Benz apps. These
have their own symbol and are filed in the
Mercedes-Benz Apps
category.
Mercedes-Benz apps are, for example:
R
Download POI
R
Local Search
You can save the imported destinations and
routes as personal POIs and routes (
Y page 68).
When importing routes, please note:
R
The Mercedes-Benz Apps may generate a
route based on a different map from the one
used by the multimedia system. Points on the
route may therefore be situated off the digital
roads.
R
The Mercedes-Benz Apps minimize the num-
ber of route points offered.
For this reason an imported route com-
menced in the multimedia system may devi-
ate from the original route from the
Mercedes-Benz Apps.
Selecting and editing personal POIs
and routes
Selecting
The example shows a personal POI.
X
Insert the SD memory card (Y page 141).
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Destination: turn and press the
controller.
X
Select From Memory Card.
The menu displays the categories available on
the SD card.
X
To select a category or Personal Routes,
turn and press the controller.
The available personal POIs or route entries
are displayed.
X
Select personal POI or personal route.
The address of the personal POI appears or
the personal route is displayed in the map.
If a large number of entries are stored, a register
for quick selection appears. Personal POIs and
routes can be saved and sorted with different
character sets (e.g. Latin, Cyrillic, Arabic).
X
To select a register: slide 9 the control-
ler.
X
To select a character: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select a character set for sorting: slide
9 the controller to select B.
X
Press the controller.
The available character sets are displayed.
The # dot indicates the current setting.
X
Turn and press the controller.
Editing
The example shows a personal route.
Personal POIs and routes
69
Navigation
Z
X
Select personal POI or personal route
(
Y page 69).
X
To explore a personal POI or personal
route: turn and press the controller to select
Map
.
The map with the crosshair appears and
shows the destination.
X
Scroll the map (Y page 54).
X
Set the map scale (Y page 82).
X
To switch to the menu: press the % button.
X
To call the personal POI: turn and press the
controller to select Call
.
If a mobile phone is connected to the multi-
media system and the telephone number is
available, the call is connected (
Y page 98).
X
To save a personal POI: turn and press the
controller to select Save
.
X
Continue saving (Y page 80).
X
To edit the name and symbol: turn and
press the controller to select Edit
.
X
Select Change Name or Edit Icon.
X
Character entry (Y page 30).
X
Select a symbol.
X
To delete a personal POI or route: turn and
press the controller to select Delete
.
A prompt will appear.
X
Select Yes or No.
If you select Yes
, the personal destination or
personal route is deleted.
X
To select the outward and return route:
select Swap
by turning and pressing the con-
troller.
The starting and destination positions of your
personal route, and thus the direction for
route guidance, are switched round. One-way
streets or restricted intersections are taken
into consideration. Therefore, the outward
and return routes may differ from each other.
X
To start route guidance: turn and press the
controller to select Start
.
Recording the route
General notes
Routes are recorded using the SD card.
Requirements: the SD card has the FAT data
system format (e.g. FAT32).
When recording the route, bear in mind the fol-
lowing:
R
If the SD card is inserted, it must not be
removed during recording.
R
if route recording was started manually, it
must be finished manually before the multi-
media system is switched off.
R
The multimedia system minimizes the num-
ber of route points recorded. Therefore when
the recorded route is subsequently com-
menced, it may differ from the route that was
originally recorded.
Starting/finishing route recording
X
Insert the SD memory card (Y page 141).
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Destination: turn and press the
controller.
X
Select From Memory Card.
X
Select Start Route Recording.
The route is recorded and REC appears at the
bottom edge of the screen.
X
To stop recording, select End Route
Recording from the menu.
The route is stored under Personal Routes
.
Displaying/editing the recorded route
X
Insert the SD memory card (Y page 141).
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Destination: turn and press the
controller.
X
Select From Memory Card.
X
Select Personal Routes.
Previously recorded routes are displayed.
X
To select a route, turn and press the control-
ler.
The map appears with a menu. The recorded
route is shown on the map in blue.
X
To calculate a route: select Start.
X
To change the name and symbol: select
Edit
.
X
Select Change Name or Edit Icon.
X
Character entry (Y page 30).
X
Select a symbol.
70
Personal POIs and routes
Navigation
Route guidance
General notes
The multimedia system calculates the route to
the destination without taking the following into
account, for example:
R
traffic lights
R
stop and yield signs
R
parking or stopping restrictions
R
road narrowing
R
temporary traffic rules and regulations
The navigation system can give differing driving
recommendations if the actual street/traffic sit-
uation does not correspond with the digital
map's data. For example, if the road layout or
the direction of a one-way street has been
changed.
For this reason, you must always observe road
and traffic rules and regulations during your
journey. Road and traffic rules and regulations
always have priority over system driving recom-
mendations.
Route guidance begins once a route has been
calculated (
Y page 59).
The multimedia system guides you to your des-
tination by means of navigation announcements
in the form of audible navigation announce-
ments and route guidance displays.
The route guidance displays can be seen if nav-
igation mode is switched on.
If you do not follow the navigation announce-
ments or if you leave the calculated route, the
multimedia system automatically calculates a
new route to the destination.
If the digital map contains the corresponding
information, the following applie
s:
R
During route guidance, the multimedia sys-
tem tries to avoid roads with restricted
access. These include, for example, roads
which are closed to through-traffic.
R
Roads that have time restrictions are consid-
ered for route guidance on days when they are
open. For this purpose, the relevant times
must be correctly stored in the database. For
example, a time restriction can mean a road is
closed on Sundays and public holidays.
Change of direction
Overview
Changes of direction have three phases:
R
Preparation phase
R
Announcement phase
R
Change-of-direction phase
Changes in direction are also shown in the mul-
tifunction display of the instrument cluster (see
the vehicle Operator's Manual).
Preparation phase
The multimedia system prepares you for the
upcoming driving maneuver, e.g. with the
announcement "Prepare to turn right". You see
the full-screen map.
Announcement phase
:
Next road or direction
;
Point at which the change of direction takes
place (white dot)
=
Change of direction (turn right here)
?
Distance to the next change of direction
The multimedia system announces the immi-
nent change of direction.
The display is now split into two sectors. The
map is shown on the left side of the display, and
a detailed image of the intersection or a 3D
image of the imminent change of direction is
shown on the right side of the display.
Route guidance
71
Navigation
Z
Change-of-direction phase
The multimedia system announces the immedi-
ate change of direction. The change of direction
is announced ahead of time, e.g. with the
announcement "Now turn right".
The display is split in two like in the announce-
ment phase.
The change of direction is performed when the
light-color bar on the right drops down to 0 ft
(0 m) and the current vehicle position symbol
has reached the white change-of-direction
point.
When the change of direction is completed, the
map will appear in full screen mode again.
Display on highways
The image shows an example of route guidance
at a highway intersection when driving on a
highway.
Lane recommendations
Display on multi-lane roads
:
Lanes not recommended (dark gray)
;
Possible lane (light gray)
=
Recommended lanes (white)
If the digital map contains the relevant data, the
multimedia system can display lane recommen-
dations on multi-lane roads for the next change
of direction.
Lane not recommended :: you will not be able
to complete the next change of direction if you
stay in this lane.
Possible lane ;: you will only be able to com-
plete the next change of direction in this lane.
Recommended lane =: in this lane you will be
able to complete the next change of direction
and the one after that.
The multimedia system shows the lane recom-
mendations for the next two changes of direc-
tion. Lane recommendations are also shown in
the multifunction display of the instrument clus-
ter (see the vehicle Operator's Manual).
Approaching new lanes
:
Approaching new lane
During the change of direction, new lanes may
be added. These will be shown in the display of
72
Route guidance
Navigation
lane recommendations with a lower boundary
line.
Highway information
Display mode
Requirement: the Highway Information map
content must be enabled (
Y page 83).
While driving on the highway, gas stations, rest
stops, rest areas and highway exits are dis-
played along with their immediate distances
from the current vehicle position.
Calling up the selection mode
X
When highway information is displayed, slide
9 the controller.
The marker is on the highway information. The
associated position is highlighted on the map.
X
To select the desired rest stop/freeway
exit: turn and press the controller.
The available POIs are displayed.
Starting route guidance to a POI
X
To select a POI: turn the controller and press
to confirm.
The POI details are displayed.
You can perform the following functions:
R
Store in the address book (Y page 80)
R
View on the map (Y page 84)
R
Called if a phone is connected and a phone
number is available (
Y page 98)
R
Select for route guidance and calculate a
route to it (
Y page 59)
Using the traffic jam function
Highway information enables the use of the traf-
fic jam function. The remaining route on the
highway in this case is blocked in the direction of
travel from the selected exit.
X
To select Detour: turn and press the control-
ler.
The traffic jam function appears
(
Y page 76).
Route guidance
73
Navigation
Z
Destination reached
Once the destination is reached, you will see the
checkered flag. Route guidance is finished.
Navigation announcements
Repeating navigation announcements
If you missed the current navigation announce-
ment, you can call it up again.
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select +: turn and press the controller.
The navigation announcement is repeated.
i
If the Repeat Spoken Driving Recom‐
mendations function has previously been
added as a favorite, you can alternatively
select the function using the favorites button
(
Y page 33).
Setting the volume manually
X
Set the volume using the thumbwheel to the
right of the controller during the navigation
announcement.
i
When you start the engine, the volume is set
to the lowest setting.
Switching navigation announcements
on/off
X
To switch off navigation announcements:
during a navigation announcement, press the
thumbwheel to the right of the controller.
or
X
Press the 8 button on the multifunction
steering wheel during a navigation message.
The Spoken driving recommendations
have been deactivated. message
appears.
X
To switch navigation announcements
back on: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select +: turn and press the controller.
The multimedia system automatically switches
the navigation announcements back on when:
R
a new route is calculated
R
the vehicle is started
A navigation message is given if the route is
recalculated during dynamic route guidance due
to new traffic reports (
Y page 77).
Canceling/continuing route guidance
Canceling route guidance
X
Slide 6 the controller.
The menu is shown.
X
To select Destination: turn and press the
controller.
X
Select Cancel Active Route Guidance.
The blue route line is no longer shown on the
map.
Resuming route guidance
X
Slide 6 the controller.
The menu is shown.
X
To select Destination: turn and press the
controller.
X
Select Continue Route Guidance.
The multimedia system calculates the route.
74
Route guidance
Navigation
Route information
Destination information
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Route: turn and press the controller.
X
Select Destination Information.
The destination and existing intermediate
destinations are displayed with distances,
travel time and arrival time.
X
To select destination or intermediate des-
tination: turn and press the controller.
The address appears.
X
Select Save.
The destination or intermediate destination
can be saved as:
R
a navigable address book contact
R
a home address
X
To call up the map, select Map.
X
Move the map, change the map scale and
select the destination or the intermediate
destination (
Y page 64).
X
To call the destination or intermediate desti-
nation, select Call
.
If a phone is connected and a phone number
is available, the multimedia system switches
to the telephone function.
Alternative Route
If the Calculate Alternative Routes setting
is activated O, different routes will be offered
each time a route is calculated (
Y page 55).
You can call up alternative routes to the current
route.
Routes 1, 2 and 4 are displayed with a dark blue
line.
Route 3 is the most economic route and is dis-
played with a green line.
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Route: turn and press the controller.
X
Select Alternative Route.
Route 1 is shown.
X
To display additional routes: select Next or
Previous
.
X
To start a new route guidance: select
Start
.
Route list
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Route: turn and press the controller.
X
Select Route List.
The route list shows the next change of direc-
tion and the immediate distances from the
current vehicle position.
X
To display additional route sections: turn
the controller.
The position of the change of direction that
belongs to the respective route section is
indicated on the map with a cross.
Route guidance
75
Navigation
Z
Where am I?
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Position: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Where am I?.
The street you are currently on and the pre-
vious and next intersections are displayed.
Traffic jam function
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Route: turn and press the controller.
X
Select Detour.
X
To specify the start of the traffic jam sec-
tion: select Beginning
.
The next possible traffic jam section starting
point is marked.
X
Turn the controller.
The marking moves along the route to the
next starting position.
X
Press the controller.
The start of the traffic jam is set.
X
To specify the end of a traffic jam section:
select End
.
The next possible traffic jam section end point
is marked.
X
Turn the controller.
The marking moves along the route to the
next end position.
X
Press the controller.
The end of the traffic jam is determined.
X
To calculate the detour: select Start.
Off-road
General notes
The navigation system may guide you to off-road
routes that your vehicle cannot drive on without
causing damage to the tires or wheels or the
vehicle itself. It is the driver’s sole responsibility
to determine the suitability of the route. The
condition of the off-road routes may vary. The
navigability of off-road routes may be influenced
by various factors such as time of day, time of
year and prevailing weather conditions. The nav-
igation system cannot judge these factors or
take them into account for route guidance.
Route guidance to an off-road destina-
tion
The multimedia system can guide you to desti-
nations which are within the area of the digital
map, but which are not themselves on the map.
These destinations are known as off-road des-
tinations, which you can enter using the map, for
example. The multimedia system guides you for
as long as possible with navigation announce-
ments and displays on roads known to the sys-
tem.
If the vehicle reaches an area which is not part of
the digital map, the display appears as a split-
screen view. On the right, an arrow appears that
points to the off-road destination. You hear the
announcement: "Please follow the arrow on the
display". As the vehicle approaches the desti-
nation, you will see a display to this effect.
Route guidance from an off-road loca-
tion to a destination
Off-road location: the vehicle's position is on the
digital map, but the map does not contain any
information about that location. The multimedia
76
Route guidance
Navigation
system is able to guide you to a destination even
from an off-road location.
At the start of route guidance, you will see the
Road Not Mapped
message, an arrow and the
distance to the destination. The arrow shows
the compass heading to the actual destination.
As soon as the vehicle is back on a road known
to the system, route guidance continues in the
usual way.
Off-road during route guidance
Due to road construction, for example, there
may be differences between the data on the
digital map and the actual course of the road.
In such cases, the system will temporarily be
unable to locate the vehicle position on the dig-
ital map. The vehicle is therefore in an off-road
position.
In the display, you will then see the Road Not
Mapped message, an arrow and the distance to
the destination. The direction arrow shows the
compass heading to the destination.
As soon as the system can assign the vehicle
position to the map again, route guidance con-
tinues in the usual way.
Real-time traffic reports
Requirements
This function is currently not available for Can-
ada.
In order to receive real-time traffic reports via
satellite radio, you need to subscribe to SIRIUS
XM Satellite Radio Traffic Message Service.
Further information on satellite radio
(
Y page 133).
The multimedia system can receive traffic
reports via satellite radio and take account of
these for route guidance in the navigation sys-
tem. Received traffic reports are displayed on
the map either as text or as symbols.
Real-time traffic reports on the map
The multimedia system can show certain traffic
incidents on the map with symbols and color
lines. Symbols show the type of incident and
color lines show the extent. Traffic reports are
shown on the map at scales of 1/32 mi to
20 mi.
When : is displayed, traffic reports can be
received or traffic reports are available. If it is
not displayed, no reception is possible.
X
To hide the menu: slide 5 and press the
controller.
The map can be seen in the full-screen dis-
play.
X
To set the map scale: turn the controller
until the desired map scale is selected.
:
Traffic jam on the route
;
Slow-moving traffic on the route
=
Road blocked
?
Traffic jam
A
Traffic warning
B
Dashed red and white line delimiting the
traffic warning
C
Road block (crosses along the affected
road)
Real-time traffic reports
77
Navigation
Z
D
Slow-moving traffic (orange line along the
affected route)
E
Traffic jam (red line along the affected route)
Displaying real-time traffic reports
Starting a search for traffic reports
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Traffic: turn and press the con-
troller.
If satellite signals cannot be received or there
are no traffic reports, you will see a message
to this effect.
X
To close the report: press the controller.
Traffic symbol information
:
Affected roads with indication of direction
;
Symbol for report type, e.g. traffic flow mes-
sage
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Traffic: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Traffic Symbol Information:
turn and press the controller.
The map appears and shows the available
traffic information as icons. The first traffic
information is highlighted.
X
To highlight additional traffic symbols, select
Next
or Previous.
X
To move the map: select Map.
You can move the map to enable further traf-
fic information to be displayed.
You can have the traffic report relevant to a traf-
fic icon shown.
X
To select Details: turn and press the con-
troller.
The report shows the following information:
R
State/province, road and display of the affec-
ted direction
R
Section of the road to which the traffic report
applies
R
Traffic icon and traffic report
X
To close the detailed display: press the
% button.
Displaying reports on the route
The function is only available while route guid-
ance is active. It shows the available traffic
reports affecting the current route.
78
Real-time traffic reports
Navigation
If there are no reports for the route or the func-
tion is not supported in the selected language:
the Messages
On Route menu item is gray and
cannot be selected.
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Traffic: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Messages On Route: turn and
press the controller.
The traffic report window appears. Several
traffic reports may be available for the calcu-
lated route, marked for example by 1/3.
The report shows the following information:
R
State/province, road and display of the
affected direction
R
Section of the road to which the traffic
report applies
R
Traffic icon and traffic report
X
To display the next/previous traffic
report: turn the controller.
X
To close the display: press the % button.
Displaying all traffic reports
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Traffic: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select All Messages: turn and press the
controller.
A list is shown containing all roads, areas or
regions affected by traffic reports. Roads,
areas or regions not on the route also appear
in the list.
X
To select the road, area or region: turn the
controller and press to confirm.
The traffic report is displayed (
Y page 78).
There may be several traffic reports for the
affected road.
X
To close the display: press the % button.
Settings for the display on the map
You can switch these displays on/off on the
map:
R
Incidents
R
Speed & Flow
R
Free Flow
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Traffic: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Traffic Information On Map:
turn and press the controller.
X
Select Incidents, Speed & Flow or Free
Flow.
The display is on O or off ª.
Reading out traffic reports on the
route
Introduction
The text reader function is only available while
route guidance is active. It reads out traffic
reports affecting the current route.
You can select from the following text reader
properties:
R
Language (Y page 40)
R
Text reader speed (Y page 37)
You can start the text reader function manually
or set it to automatic.
Starting the text reader function man-
ually
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Traffic: turn and press the con-
troller.
Real-time traffic reports
79
Navigation
Z
X
Select Read Out All Messages on Route.
The multimedia system reads out the reports
in sequential order.
If there are no reports for the route, the Read
Out All Messages on Route menu item is
gray and cannot be selected.
X
To cancel the read-aloud function: select
Cancel Read-Aloud Function
.
The multimedia system reads the current
report aloud and then exits the read-aloud
function.
Automatic text reader function
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Traffic: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Read Traffic Announcements
Automatically.
Depending on the previous state, switch the
option on O or off ª.
Recalculating the route dynamically
The Dynamic Traffic Route route type takes
into account all of the traffic reports it receives
for the current route when calculating the route
(
Y page 55).
If you have selected Dynamic Traffic Route
as the route type, the multimedia system guides
you to your destination along the updated route.
Storing destinations
General notes
If a route to a destination has been calculated,
the multimedia system saves the destination to
the last destinations memory. If the memory is
full, the multimedia system overwrites the old-
est destination. When you save the current vehi-
cle position or a crosshair position, this position
is stored in the "Last destinations" memory.
You can save destinations permanently in the
address book and on an SD card. For example,
you can save a destination as your home
address immediately after entering the address
(
Y page 58).
Requirements: the SD card has the FAT data
system format (e.g. FAT32).
Storing the destination in the address
book
The example shows an intermediate destina-
tion.
X
To select Save: turn and press the controller.
A menu appears.
X
New contact: select As New Contact.
If the address book already contains con-
tacts, the entry Add
to Contact is also avail-
able.
X
Select Not Classified, Home or Work.
An input menu shows the destination
address.
X
Enter a surname and first name. Character
entry (
Y page 30).
X
To select OK: turn and press the controller.
The Saving Successful
message appears.
The destination address is saved in the
address book as a navigable contact.
X
To add to a contact: select Add to Con‐
tact.
The address book appears.
X
Search for a contact (Y page 104).
X
Press the controller.
The Saving Successful
message appears.
The destination address is allocated to a con-
tact in the address book.
Telephone numbers are not transferred to the
telephone number fields of the address book.
After selecting the destination address from
the address book for navigation, the associ-
ated telephone number will be displayed.
If the contact already has two destination
addresses, a prompt will appear asking if a
destination address should be overwritten.
80
Storing destinations
Navigation
X
Select Yes or No.
If you select Yes
, a list showing both destina-
tion addresses appears.
X
To select the destination address: turn and
press the controller.
The destination address is overwritten.
X
Select Save as "My address" As "My
Address".
The destination is saved as your home
address.
Saving a destination to an SD card
X
Insert the SD memory card (Y page 141).
X
Select a POI, for example (Y page 61).
X
To select Save: turn and press the controller.
A menu appears.
X
Select To Memory Card.
If no destination has been saved yet on the SD
card, an input menu will appear.
or
X
Select Not Classified or, if available, select
a category that you have created yourself.
An input menu appears.
X
Enter a new name and a new category for the
destination in the input menu if required.
Character entry (
Y page 31).
X
Select OK.
The Saving Successful
message appears.
The destination is saved to the SD card.
Saving the current vehicle position
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Position: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Save.
The current vehicle position is saved in "Last
destinations".
Saving the crosshair position
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To display the crosshair: press the control-
ler.
X
Move the map to the desired position
(
Y page 54).
X
To show the menu: press the controller.
X
To select Position: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Save.
The crosshair position is saved in the last des-
tinations.
Editing the last destinations
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Destination: turn and press the
controller.
X
Select From Previous Destinations.
The "Last destinations" memory appears.
X
To save the destination: select the destina-
tion.
The destination address appears.
X
Store the destination in the address book
(
Y page 80).
X
Save the destination to the SD card
(
Y page 81).
X
To view the details: while in the "Last desti-
nations" memory, turn the controller and
highlight the entry.
X
Slide 9 the controller.
A menu appears.
X
To select Details: press the controller.
i
The destination address can be changed if
desired. For instance, a different street or
house number can be selected.
X
To delete one or all destinations: while in
the "Last destinations" memory, turn the con-
troller and highlight the entry.
Storing destinations
81
Navigation
Z
X
Slide 9 the controller.
A menu appears.
X
To select Delete or Delete All: turn and
press the controller.
A prompt appears.
X
Select Yes or No.
Selecting Yes
deletes the selected destina-
tion or all destinations.
Map functions
General notes
Company logos displayed on the map are trade-
marks of the respective companies and used
solely for the purpose of indicating the locations
of these companies. The use of such logos on
the map does not indicate approval of, support
of or advertising by these companies for the
navigation system itself.
i
Alternatively, you can carry out this opera-
tion using the touchpad (
Y page 24).
Map settings
Setting the map scale
Requirement: the map is in full screen mode, the
menu is faded out (
Y page 54).
The lower left-hand section of the map shows
the currently set map scale and compass nee-
dle.
Right-hand-drive vehicles: the currently set map
scale and compass needle are displayed in the
lower right-hand section of the map.
X
To show the map in full screen mode: to
hide the menu, push the % button.
or
X
Slide the controller to the center of the map
and press to confirm.
X
To set the map scale: as soon as you turn the
controller, the scale bar appears on the bot-
tom of the display.
X
Turn the controller until the needle points to
the desired map scale.
Once you are finished selecting a map scale,
the new map scale will be shown.
Selecting map orientation
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Map Orientation.
The # dot indicates the current setting.
X
Turn and press the controller.
The map orientation is set.
Change
map direc-
tion
Explanation
North Up
0 The map view is displayed
so that north is always up.
Heading Up
¤ The map view is aligned to
the direction of travel. The
direction of travel is always at
the top; the red tip of the sym-
bol points north.
3-D Map
¤ The map view is aligned to
the direction of travel. The
map displays a 3D oblique
view with elevation; the red tip
of the symbol points north.
82
Map functions
Navigation
Selecting POI symbols on the map
POIs can be displayed as symbols in the map
display. POIs include, for example, gas stations,
hotels and restaurants.
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Map Content.
X
Select POI Symbols On Map.
The # dot indicates the current setting.
X
Turn and press the controller.
Default Symbols
shows symbols of prede-
fined categories in the map.
Custom
Symbols allows symbols to be selec-
ted from other/all available categories.
X
Turn and press the controller.
You have the option of selecting symbols to
be displayed O or not displayed ª on the
map.
The list shows all symbols that are contained
on the digital map across all countries. How-
ever, not all points of interest are available in
all countries. As a result, certain point of inter-
est symbols may not be displayed on the map,
even if the symbol display is switched on.
Selecting text information on the map
At the bottom of the display, you can specify
whether to display geo-coordinates or not to
display text information for the street you are
currently on.
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Map Content.
X
Select Text Information On Map.
The # dot indicates the current setting.
X
Turn and press the controller.
Current
Street shows the current street at
the bottom of the display.
Geo-coordinates
shows the longitude and
latitude, elevation and number of satellites
received.
The elevation shown may deviate from the
actual elevation.
X
Turn and press the controller.
Switching highway information on/off
The following can be displayed when driving on
a highway:
R
the nearest gas stations and rest stops
R
rest areas and highway exits
and their present distances from the vehicle's
current position (
Y page 73)
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Map Content.
X
Select Highway Information.
Switch the display in the map on O or off ª.
Further information (
Y page 73).
Displaying the next crossroads
If route guidance is not active, the next cross-
roads can be displayed at the upper edge of the
display.
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Map Content.
X
Select Next Intersecting Street.
Switch the display in the map on O or off ª.
Map functions
83
Navigation
Z
Showing the map version
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Map Content.
X
Select Map Version.
Information on the current map version is
shown. Information about new versions of the
digital map can be obtained from an author-
ized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Rotating the 3D map
You can use this function to explore the vicinity
of the destination in a 3D view. The function is
available in all map scales.
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Position: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select 3D Map Rotation.
X
Turn the controller to change to the 3D map
perspective.
Additional functions:
R
Moving the map (Y page 54)
Map display
Displaying the navigation map
The multimedia system displays the navigation
map and globe satellite images. This allows for a
realistic map display free from distortion in all
map scales.
Other functions:
R
Moving the map (Y page 54)
R
Changing the map scale (Y page 82)
Building images
In small map scales 1/32 mi (20 m) and 1/16 mi
(50 m) important buildings are depicted realis-
tically on the map. Other buildings are shown as
models.
Elevation model
The map uses elevation modeling to show a
realistic illustration.
84
Map functions
Navigation
Avoiding an area
General notes
The multimedia system enables you to avoid
areas you do not wish to drive through.
If you activate or deactivate a route block while
route guidance is active, the multimedia system
will calculate a new route. If you activate or
deactivate a route block while route guidance is
inactive, the multimedia system will use the new
setting for the next route guidance.
The calculated route can contain an area to be
avoided, if:
R
the destination is located in an area to be
avoided.
R
there is no alternative route of similar length.
Highways within blocked areas are always taken
into consideration in the route calculation.
i
Alternatively, you can carry out this opera-
tion using the touchpad (
Y page 24).
Avoiding a new area
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Route Settings.
X
Select Avoid Options.
X
Select Avoid Area.
X
Select Avoid New Area.
A menu appears.
X
Select Using Map or Address Entry.
If you select Using Map
, the map with cross-
hair appears.
When you have selected Address Entry
the
address entry menu appears (
Y page 57). The
map appears with the crosshair after the
address is entered.
X
To select an area: when the map with cross-
hair appears, press the controller.
A red square appears on the map, symbolizing
the area to be blocked.
X
To change the size of the area, turn the con-
troller.
The map scale is shown at the bottom of the
display. The needle points to the map scale
currently selected.
X
When the desired size is set, press the con-
troller.
The area is entered into the list.
Turning an area on/off and displaying/
changing the area
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Route Settings.
X
Select Avoid Options.
X
Select Avoid Area.
A list appears.
Map functions
85
Navigation
Z
X
To switch an area to avoid on/off: select an
area by turning and pressing the controller.
The area will be avoided O or not ª.
X
To display/change an area: mark an area by
turning the controller.
X
Slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Display/Change: press the con-
troller.
The map with the crosshair appears.
The area currently blocked is displayed as a
red square.
X
To move the area to a new location: slide
1, 4, 2 the controller.
X
To change the size of the area: press the con-
troller.
X
Turn the controller.
X
To accept changes: press the controller.
A message appears stating that the area has
been set.
Deleting one/all areas
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Route Settings.
X
Select Avoid Options.
X
Select Avoid Area.
A list appears.
X
To delete an area: mark an area by turning
the controller.
X
Slide 9 the controller.
X
Select Delete or Delete All.
A prompt appears asking whether you wish to
delete the area.
X
Select Yes or No.
After selecting Yes
, the area is deleted.
X
To delete all areas: when the list appears,
slide 9 the controller.
X
Select Delete All.
A prompt appears asking whether you wish to
delete all areas.
X
Select Yes or No.
After selecting Yes
, all areas are deleted.
SIRIUS XM service
Displaying SIRIUS XM service informa-
tion
You can display the SIRIUS XM service informa-
tion.
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Traffic: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select SIRIUS Service.
The provider's phone number (SIRIUS XM)
and the serial number of your service module
are displayed.
i
Alternatively you can call up this function
using the touchpad (
Y page 24).
Registering for the SIRIUS XM traffic
report service
X
Call the provider telephone number shown on
the multimedia system display.
i
You can also have the satellite service acti-
vated online. To do so, visit the SIRIUS XM
Radio website at http://www.sirius.com
(USA).
X
The connection is established: follow the
service employee's instructions.
The activation process may take up to ten
minutes.
i
If registration is not included when purchas-
ing the system, your credit card details will be
required to activate your account.
Updating the digital map
Introduction
The digital maps generated by the map software
become outdated in the same way as conven-
tional road maps. Optimal route guidance can
only be provided by the navigation system in
conjunction with the most up-to-date map soft-
ware.
Information about new versions of the digital
map can be obtained from an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. You can have the digital
map updated there using a data medium, or you
can update it yourself.
86
Map functions
Navigation
Carrying out a manual update
You can carry out the update yourself.
The update process may take some time (up to
45 minutes), depending on the size of the digital
map. The update will be completed more quickly
if the vehicle is stationary. If you begin the
update while the vehicle is stationary and the
starter battery has insufficient power, the mul-
timedia system may switch off automatically.
This protects the battery. In order to prevent
this, a suitable power supply to the vehicle must
be maintained.
Functions in the Navigation menu
Calling up the navigation system
menu
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
ß button.
X
To show the menu: slide 5 the controller.
Navi
is highlighted in the main function bar.
X
Press the controller.
The navigation menu appears.
X
Turn the controller.
The functions are displayed one after another.
X
To switch to the map, turn the controller until
Navigation
appears and press the control-
ler.
Calling up the online map display
Requirement for online map display (USA):
mbrace must be activated for Internet access
(
Y page 120).
Requirement for the online map display (Can-
ada): a mobile phone is connected to the multi-
media system via Bluetooth
®
(Y page 92) or
USB (
Y page 153).
X
Call up the navigation menu (Y page 87).
X
Turn the controller until Online Map Dis‐
play is brought to the front.
X
Press the controller.
The online connection is established. Once
the connection is established, the Google
Maps™ map shows the vicinity of the current
vehicle position.
i
Alternatively you can call up this function
using the touchpad (
Y page 24).
X
To exit the online map display: press the %
button.
Calling up the compass display
X
Call up the navigation menu (Y page 87).
X
Turn the controller until Compass is brought to
the front.
X
Press the controller.
The compass display provides the following
information:
R
The current direction of travel with bearing
(360 degree format) and compass direction
R
Longitude and latitude coordinates in
degrees, minutes and seconds
R
Height (rounded off) above sea level
R
Number of GPS satellites from which a sig-
nal can be received
i
Alternatively you can call up this function
using the touchpad (
Y page 24).
X
To exit the compass display: press the %
button.
Drive information
Functions in the Navigation menu
87
Navigation
Z
X
Call up the navigation menu (Y page 87).
X
Turn the controller until Drive Information
is brought to the front.
X
Press the controller.
The Starting Drive Information.
Please Wait... message appears.
You will then see maps with the current vehi-
cle position and the vicinity of the destination
in different scales, these are automatically
displayed one after another.
If mbrace is activated for Internet access
(
Y page 120), additional information can be
displayed, e.g. weather at the destination.
i
Alternatively you can call up this function
using the touchpad (
Y page 24).
X
To exit Drive Information: press the controller.
X
Press the % button.
Route flight
X
Call up the navigation menu (Y page 87).
X
Turn the controller until Route Flight is
brought to the front.
X
Press the controller.
i
Alternatively you can call up this function
using the touchpad (
Y page 24).
X
Select Ì.
The route will be flown along from a helicopter
perspective.
X
To stop route flight: select Ë.
X
To exit the route flight: press the controller.
X
Press the % button.
Info on navigation
X
Call up the navigation menu (Y page 87).
X
Turn the controller until Info on Naviga‐
tion is brought to the front.
X
Press the controller.
The Digital Operator's Manual is opened at
the section on navigation.
i
Alternatively you can call up this function
using the touchpad (
Y page 24).
Problems with the navigation system
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The multimedia system
does not resume route
guidance after the jour-
ney has been interrup-
ted.
Route guidance is canceled if you interrupt the journey for more than
two hours.
"Interrupting the journey" refers to stopping the vehicle.
"Continuing route guidance" refers to switching the multimedia sys-
tem back on and driving on.
X
Continue route guidance (Y page 74).
88
Problems with the navigation system
Navigation
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The multimedia system
is unable to determine
the vehicle's position.
The multimedia system must identify the vehicle’s position again after
it has been transported.
Example:
R
After transporting the vehicle by ferry
R
After transporting the vehicle by motorail
X
Start the vehicle and pull away.
The multimedia system calculates the vehicle's position. Depending
on the driving situation, this may take some time.
Route guidance may be restricted during the determination of the
vehicle's position.
When positioning is complete, route guidance is resumed with nav-
igation announcements and route guidance displays.
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The Navigation
Unavailable Please
refer to the Opera‐
tor's Manual. mes-
sage appears.
The multimedia system has an integrated hard drive on which the
digital map is stored.
To protect the integrated hard drive against damage, the multimedia
system deactivates it at very high and low temperatures. The naviga-
tion system will then be temporarily unavailable.
X
Let the vehicle and the multimedia system heat up or cool down to
a normal temperature.
X
To hide the message: switch the multimedia system off and then
on again.
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
A message informs you
that the data medium
containing the digital
map is incompatible with
the vehicle software.
The data medium containing the digital map cannot be used for the
update.
X
To confirm the message: press the controller.
X
Remove the data medium.
X
Have the system database checked at an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center.
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The map software
update has failed.
The data medium is dirty.
X
Clean the data medium.
X
Restart the update.
The data medium is scratched.
X
Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Problems with the navigation system
89
Navigation
Z
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
There is overheating due to excessive temperatures in the vehicle
interior.
X
Wait until the vehicle interior has cooled down.
X
Restart the update.
The multimedia system's integral hard disk has been physically dam-
aged.
X
Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The multimedia system
asks for an activation
code during the map
update.
The digital map is secured with an activation code.
X
Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
90
Problems with the navigation system
Navigation
Your multimedia system equipment
These operating instructions describe all the
standard and optional equipment of your multi-
media system, as available at the time of going
to press. Country-specific differences are pos-
sible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not
feature all functions described here. This also
applies to safety-relevant systems and func-
tions.
Read the information on qualified specialist
workshops in the vehicle Operator's Manual.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you operate mobile communication equip-
ment when driving, you may be distracted
from the traffic situation. You could also lose
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
accident.
Only operate this equipment when the vehicle
is stationary.
If you make a call on your mobile phone while
driving, always use hands-free mode. Only use
the mobile phone when road, weather and traffic
conditions permit. Some jurisdictions prohibit
the driver from using a mobile phone while driv-
ing a vehicle.
Keep in mind that at a speed of 30 mph (approx-
imately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers a distance
of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) per second.
Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation
may cause damage to your health and the health
of others.
There is scientific discussion surrounding the
possible health risks posed by electromagnetic
fields. You can reduce this risk by using an exte-
rior antenna.
Therefore, connect your mobile communica-
tions equipment to the vehicle's exterior
antenna wherever possible.
General notes
Telephony
A Bluetooth
®
interface is available for teleph-
ony.
If your mobile phone supports the Bluetooth
®
profile PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile), the
contacts are automatically displayed in the mul-
timedia system.
You can use the message function if your mobile
phone supports the MAP Bluetooth
®
profile
(Message Access Profile).
With a suitable mobile phone, you can use the
hands-free system and receive vCards via the
Bluetooth
®
interface.
You can obtain more information about suitable
mobile phones on the Internet at
http://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect.
Or call the Mercedes-Benz Service Center at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) for
the USA or at 1-800-387-0100 for Canada.
HD Voice
®
The multimedia system supports telephone
calls in HD Voice
®
. The voice quality can be
improved with this procedure.
Requirements for HD Voice
®
:
R
Your mobile phone and mobile phone network
provider support HD Voice
®
.
R
The mobile phone and mobile phone network
provider of the person you are calling support
HD Voice
®
.
Depending on the quality of the connection, the
voice quality may fluctuate.
Call disconnection while the vehicle is
in motion
A call may be disconnected if:
R
there is insufficient network coverage in cer-
tain areas
R
you move from one transmitter/receiver area
(cell) into another and no channels are free
R
you use a SIM card that is not compatible with
the network available
General notes
91
Telephone
Z
Operating options
You can operate the telephone by:
R
using the controller by turning, pressing, slid-
ing 1 or 4
R
using the touchpad (Y page 24)
R
using the 6 or ~ button on the multi-
function steering wheel
R
using the Voice Control System (see the sep-
arate operating instructions)
Function restrictions
You may have to wait to use telephony via the
multimedia system in the following situations:
R
if the mobile phone is switched off
R
if Bluetooth
®
is switched off on the mobile
phone
R
if the mobile phone is not (or not yet) logged
into a mobile phone network
R
if the Bluetooth
®
function is switched off in
the multimedia system
The telephone automatically tries to log on to a
network. If no network is available, you may not
be able to make a "911" emergency call. If you
attempt to make an outgoing call, the No Ser‐
vice message will appear for a short while.
Telephone menu
:
Mobile phone network provider
;
Signal strength of the mobile phone network
=
Receiver icon ¢ or ¡
?
Telephone menu character bar
A
Bluetooth
®
device name of the currently
connected mobile phone
B
Enters characters using the touchpad
C
Displays the phone book
Symbols : to = and A are not shown until
after a mobile phone has been connected to the
multimedia system. The symbols depend on
your mobile phone and your mobile phone net-
work provider. Further information on connect-
ing a mobile phone (
Y page 92).
Symbol ; shows the current signal strength of
the mobile phone network for reception. If all
bars are filled, you have optimum reception.
If the bars are not filled, you have very poor
reception or no reception at all.
i
Receiver icon shows whether a call is
active/being connected ¡ or not ¢.
Calling up the telephone menu
X
Press %.
Showing the menu bar
X
Slide 6 the controller.
If the mobile phone connected supports the
MAP Bluetooth
®
profile (Message Access
Profile), the 1 menu item is available. Further
information on text messages and e-mail
(
Y page 113).
If you have an unread text message or e-mail,
the 0 mail symbol is displayed at the top in
the status bar. The symbol disappears once you
have read the text message or e-mail. The ú
symbol is displayed as soon as the message
memory on the mobile phone or SIM card is full.
The symbol disappears once you delete at least
one message.
Connecting/disconnecting a mobile
phone
Requirements
For telephony via the Bluetooth
®
interface, you
require a Bluetooth
®
-capable mobile phone. The
mobile phone must support Hands-Free Profile
1.0 or above.
On the multimedia system
X
Activate Bluetooth
®
(Y page 40).
92
Connecting/disconnecting a mobile phone
Telephone
On the mobile phone
X
Switch on the mobile phone and enter the PIN
when prompted to do so (see the manufac-
turer's operating instructions).
X
Activate Bluetooth
®
and, if necessary, Blue-
tooth
®
visibility for other devices (see the
manufacturer's operating instructions).
This visibility is for restricted periods of time
on some mobile phones (see the manufactur-
er's operating instructions).
X
Set the Bluetooth
®
device name for the
mobile phone if necessary.
The Bluetooth
®
device names for all of one man-
ufacturer's products might be identical. To
make it possible to clearly identify your mobile
phone, change the device name (see the man-
ufacturer's operating instructions). The name
can be freely selected.
If the mobile phone supports the PBAP (Phone
Book Access Profile) and MAP (Message
Access Profile) Bluetooth
®
profiles, the follow-
ing information will be transmitted after you
connect:
R
Phone book
R
Call lists
R
Messages
Further information on allowing or suppressing
the automatic download of the phone book
(
Y page 108).
The battery of the mobile phone should always
be kept sufficiently charged in order to prevent
malfunctions.
i
Not all mobile phones available on the mar-
ket are equally suitable. You can obtain fur-
ther information about suitable mobile
phones and about the connection between
the mobile phone and the multimedia system
on the Internet at http://www.mercedes-
benz.com/connect.
You can also obtain more information by call-
ing.
In the USA, you can get in touch with the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372).
In Canada, you can get in touch with the Cus-
tomer Relations Center on 1-800-387-0100.
i
Some displays (e.g. the signal strength) are
shown depending on the supported version of
the Hands-Free Profile.
Procedure and general information
Searching for and authorizing (connecting)
a mobile phone
Before using your mobile phone with the multi-
media system for the first time, you will need to
search for the phone (
Y page 94) and then
authorize it (
Y page 94). Depending on the
mobile phone, authorization either takes place
by means of Secure Simple Pairing or by enter-
ing a passkey. The multimedia system automat-
ically makes the procedure that is relevant for
your mobile phone available. You can recognize
Secure Simple Pairing by the fact that a code is
displayed on the mobile phone and on the mul-
timedia system. You can recognize the passkey
system by the fact that you have to enter a code
on the mobile phone and on the multimedia sys-
tem. The mobile phone is always connected
automatically after authorization.
If the multimedia system does not detect your
mobile phone, this may be due to particular
security settings on your mobile phone. You can
also start the search procedure and authoriza-
tion on the mobile phone (
Y page 95).
Device-specific information on authorizing and
connecting Bluetooth
®
-capable mobile phones
can be found on the Internet at http://
www.mercedes-benz.com/connect.
You can authorize up to 15 mobile phones. After
authorization, the connection of the last two tel-
ephones used always functions automatically.
Only one mobile phone can be connected to the
multimedia system at any one time.
De-authorizing (disconnecting) a mobile
phone
The connection is terminated automatically if
you leave the receiver range of the multimedia
system or deactivate Bluetooth
®
on your mobile
phone.
If you no longer want the Bluetooth
®
connection
to be established automatically, the mobile
phone must be de-authorized (disconnected)
(
Y page 96).
Connecting/disconnecting a mobile phone
93
Telephone
Z
Searching for a mobile phone
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To switch to the menu bar in the telephone
menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Connect Device: turn and press
the controller.
The device list is displayed.
X
To select Search for Phones: turn and
press the controller.
A message is displayed that Bluetooth
®
must
be activated on the mobile phone and must be
made visible to other devices.
X
To select Start Search: press the controller.
The available mobile phones are displayed in
the device list.
The duration of the search depends on the num-
ber of Bluetooth
®
telephones within range and
their characteristics.
If a new phone is found, it appears in the device
list with the Ï symbol. You can now author-
ize (connect) the mobile phone found
(
Y page 94).
If the maximum number of authorized devices in
the device list is reached, you will be requested
to de-authorize a mobile phone (
Y page 96).
When you call up the device list again, de-
authorized devices will be removed from the list.
To update the device list, start the search again.
Symbols in the device list
Sym-
bol
Explanation
Ï
New mobile phone found, not yet
authorized.
Ñ
Mobile phone is authorized, but is
not connected.
#
Mobile phone is authorized and
connected.
Authorizing a mobile phone (connect-
ing)
Authorization via Secure Simple Pairing
If the multimedia system has found your mobile
phone, you can authorize (connect) it.
X
To select a mobile phone from the device list:
turn the controller and press to confirm.
A code is displayed in the multimedia system
and on the mobile phone.
The code is the same
X
Multimedia system: select Yes.
X
Mobile phone: confirm the code. Depending
on the mobile phone used, you may have to
confirm the connection to the multimedia sys-
tem and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth
®
profiles. The prompt to confirm may take up
to two minutes to be displayed. You may also
save the confirmation on the mobile phone
(see the manufacturer's operating instruc-
tions).
The mobile phone is now authorized and con-
nected to the multimedia system. You can
now speak using the hands-free system.
To ensure an optimum language quality, you can
set the mobile phone's transmission and recep-
tion volume (
Y page 96).
The code is different
X
Multimedia system: select No.
The process is canceled. Repeat the authori-
zation.
Authorization via passkey entry (access
code)
If the multimedia system has found your mobile
phone, you can authorize (connect) it.
94
Connecting/disconnecting a mobile phone
Telephone
X
To select the Bluetooth
®
name of the desired
mobile phone in the device list: turn and press
the controller.
The input menu for the passkey is displayed.
The passkey is a one- to sixteen-digit number
combination which you can choose yourself.
X
Multimedia system: enter the passkey using
the character bar.
X
Select ¬ once all the numbers have been
entered.
X
Mobile phone: enter the same passkey and
confirm your entry. Depending on the mobile
phone used, you may have to confirm the
connection to the multimedia system and for
the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth
®
profiles. The
prompt to confirm may take up to two
minutes to be displayed. You may also save
the confirmation on the mobile phone (see the
manufacturer's operating instructions).
The mobile phone is now authorized and con-
nected to the multimedia system. You can
now speak using the hands-free system.
To ensure an optimum language quality, you can
set the mobile phone's transmission and recep-
tion volume (
Y page 96).
If the Authorization Failed
message
appears, you may have entered a different pass-
key or exceeded the prescribed time limit.
Repeat the procedure.
i
Some mobile phones require a passkey with
four or more digits.
i
If you wish to re-authorize the mobile phone
after de-authorizing it, you can choose
another passkey for it.
Establishing the connection from the
mobile phone
The Bluetooth
®
device name of the multimedia
system is MB Bluetooth
.
X
Multimedia system: call up the telephone
menu.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Connect Device: turn and press
the controller.
The device list is displayed.
X
To select Connect via Phone: turn and
press the controller.
A message is displayed, stating that you can
start the search on your mobile phone.
X
Mobile phone: start the search for a Blue-
tooth
®
device (see manufacturer's operating
instructions).
The multimedia system is displayed with the
name MB Bluetooth
in the mobile phone's
device list.
X
Select MB Bluetooth.
A prompt appears in the multimedia system's
display asking if the mobile phone should be
authorized.
X
Multimedia system: select Yes.
If No
is selected, the procedure is canceled.
If your mobile phone supports Secure Simple
Pairing, a code is now displayed on both devi-
ces.
The code is the same
X
Multimedia system: select Yes.
X
Mobile phone: confirm the code. Depending
on the mobile phone used, you may have to
confirm the connection to the multimedia sys-
tem and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth
®
profiles. The prompt to confirm may take up
to two minutes to be displayed. You may also
save the confirmation on the mobile phone
(see the manufacturer's operating instruc-
tions).
The mobile phone is now authorized and con-
nected to the multimedia system. You can
now speak using the hands-free system.
To ensure an optimum language quality, you can
set the mobile phone's transmission and recep-
tion volume (
Y page 96).
The code is different
X
Multimedia system: select No.
The process is canceled. Repeat the proce-
dure.
If your mobile phone does not support Secure
Simple Pairing, an input menu is displayed for
the passkey. The passkey is a one- to sixteen-
digit number combination which you can choose
yourself. Enter the same passkey in both the
multimedia system and on the mobile phone and
confirm. Depending on the mobile phone used,
you may have to confirm the connection to the
multimedia system and for the PBAP and MAP
Bluetooth
®
profiles.
Connecting/disconnecting a mobile phone
95
Telephone
Z
Reconnecting automatically
The multimedia system always searches for the
last connected mobile phone.
If no connection can be made to the most
recently connected mobile phone, the system
searches for the mobile phone that was con-
nected before that one.
Switching between mobile phones
If you have authorized more than one mobile
phone, you can switch between the individual
phones.
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To show the menu bar: slide 6 the control-
ler.
X
To select Connect Device: turn and press
the controller.
The device list is displayed.
X
To select the desired mobile phone: turn and
press the controller.
The selected mobile phone is searched for
and connected if it is within Bluetooth
®
range
and if Bluetooth
®
is activated.
Only one mobile phone can be connected at any
one time. The currently connected mobile
phone is indicated by the # dot in the device list.
i
You can only switch to another authorized
mobile phone if you are not currently making
a call.
De-authorizing (disconnecting) a
mobile phone
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC recommends de-
authorization in the multimedia system as well
as on the mobile phone. Subsequent authoriza-
tion may otherwise fail.
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To show the menu bar: slide 6 the control-
ler.
X
To select Connect Device: turn and press
the controller.
X
To highlight the desired mobile phone in the
device list: turn the controller.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Deauthorize: turn and press the
controller.
A prompt appears, asking whether you really
wish to de-authorize this device.
X
To select Yes: turn and press the controller.
The mobile phone is de-authorized.
i
Before re-authorizing the mobile phone, you
should also delete the device name MB
Blue‐
tooth from your mobile phone's Bluetooth
®
list.
Displaying connection details
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To switch to the menu bar in the telephone
menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Connect Device: turn and press
the controller.
X
To highlight the desired mobile phone in the
device list: turn the controller.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Details: turn and press the con-
troller.
The following information concerning the
selected mobile phone is shown:
R
Bluetooth
®
device name
R
Bluetooth
®
address
R
Availability status (shown after a new
search)
R
Authorization status
X
To close the detailed display: slide 8 the
controller.
Reception and transmission volume
Once the mobile phone has been authorized,
you can optimize the transmission and recep-
tion volume settings. To find out about the best
possible settings for your mobile phone, visit
http://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect.
Or call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) (USA) or Customer Relations
at 1-800-387-0100 (Canada).
96
Reception and transmission volume
Telephone
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Connect Device: turn and press
the controller.
The device list appears.
X
To highlight the desired mobile phone in the
device list: turn the controller.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Reception Volume or Transmis‐
sion Volume: turn and press the controller.
X
To select a volume setting: turn the controller.
X
To accept changes: press the controller.
i
Incorrect settings may have an impact on
the quality of calls.
Using the telephone
Accepting a call
X
To select w Accept: press the controller.
or
X
Press 6 on the multifunction steering
wheel.
The call is accepted.
Additional functions available during a call
(
Y page 98).
Adjusting the call volume (
Y page 96).
Further information about ending a call
(
Y page 100).
i
If the phone number of the caller is trans-
ferred, it appears in the display. If the phone
number is saved in the phone book, the con-
tact's name is also displayed. If the phone
number is not transferred, Unknown
is shown
in the display.
Rejecting a call
X
To select = Reject: turn and press the
controller.
or
X
Press ~ on the multifunction steering
wheel.
Making a call
Using the telephone menu
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To select the sequence of numbers: turn and
press the controller for each number.
X
To select w in the telephone menu: turn
and press the controller.
The call is made.
Further information about ending a call
(
Y page 100).
Using the touchpad
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To select n: turn and press the controller.
X
Draw the sequence of numbers on the touch-
sensitive surface.
X
To select w in the telephone menu: turn
and press the controller.
The call is made.
Further information about the touchpad
(
Y page 26).
Using favorites
This function can be used when a telephone
number has been added as a favorite. Further
information about adding favorites (
Y page 33).
X
Press the favorites button on the controller.
The favorites are displayed.
X
To select a telephone number: turn the con-
troller.
X
To make a call: press the controller.
Using the telephone
97
Telephone
Z
Redial number
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To select w in the telephone menu: turn
and press the controller.
The list of outgoing calls is displayed. The
most recently dialed number is at the top.
X
To select an entry and make a call: turn and
press the controller.
For redialing using the multifunction steering
wheel (see the vehicle Operator's Manual).
Further information about ending a call
(
Y page 100).
Using call lists
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Call Lists: turn and press the
controller.
X
To select Calls Received or Calls Dialed:
turn and press the controller.
The relevant list is displayed.
X
To select an entry and make a call: turn and
press the controller.
Selecting and placing a call using the multifunc-
tion steering wheel (see vehicle Operator's Man-
ual)
Further information about ending a call
(
Y page 100).
Using the phone book
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To select the symbol in the telephone
menu: turn and press the controller.
X
Search for a contact (Y page 101).
X
To make a call: press the controller.
Selecting and placing a call using the multifunc-
tion steering wheel (see vehicle Operator's Man-
ual)
Further information about ending a call
(
Y page 100).
Using speed dial
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To highlight a number from the character bar:
turn the controller.
X
Press the controller for longer than two sec-
onds.
The telephone menu displays the selected
entry. The number is dialed.
Further information on setting up speed dial
(
Y page 112).
Further information about ending a call
(
Y page 100).
Functions available during a call
Overview
:
Adds a call (Y page 98)
;
Person you are calling
=
Symbol for active telephone connection
?
Ends a call
A
Switches the microphone on or off
(
Y page 99)
B
Sends DTMF tones (not possible with all
mobile phones) (
Y page 99)
Other functions:
R
Accepting a waiting call (Y page 100)
R
Call waiting (Y page 99)
R
Conducting a conference call (Y page 100)
Availability depends on the mobile phone net-
work provider (only possible on GSM networks)
and the Bluetooth
®
mobile phone.
Adding a call
If the mobile phone network provider and the
mobile phone support the function, you can
98
Using the telephone
Telephone
make another call during an existing call. The
previously active call is held.
:
Adds a call
X
To select °
2
: turn and press the controller.
X
To make a call, for example:
R
using the telephone menu (Y page 97)
R
using redial (Y page 98)
R
using the call lists (Y page 98)
R
using the phone book (Y page 98)
R
using speed dial (Y page 98)
Switching the microphone on/off
This function is available in the telephone menu
during an active phone call.
Switching off the microphone:
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Microphone Off: turn and press
the controller.
If the microphone is switched off, the Q
symbol and the The microphone is off.
message are displayed.
Switching on the microphone:
X
Select Microphone On.
The Q symbol disappears. The The micro‐
phone is on. message is shown.
Sending DTMF tones
This function is not supported by all mobile
phones.
Answering machines or other devices can be
controlled by DTMF tones, e.g. for remote query
functions.
X
If you would like to listen to the messages on
your answering machine, for example, dial the
corresponding number.
Transmitting individual characters
X
Once a connection has been established to
the answer phone, select the desired charac-
ters in the telephone menu: turn and press the
controller each time.
Every character selected will be transmitted
immediately.
Calls with several participants
Switching between calls (call waiting)
If you make another call, you can switch
between the two calls (call waiting). This func-
tion depends on your mobile phone network
provider and the mobile phone (see the manu-
facturer's operating instructions).
The calls are marked 1 and 2. The active call is
highlighted.
Switching between the calls
X
To select °
1
or °
2
: turn and press the con-
troller.
or
X
Press 6 on the multifunction steering
wheel.
The selected call is active. The other call is on
hold.
Ending the active call
X
To select = in the telephone menu: turn
and press the controller.
or
X
Press ~ on the multifunction steering
wheel.
The other call is still on hold.
Using the telephone
99
Telephone
Z
X
To activate the call on hold: select w
Resume.
The call on hold is activated. If you select
=
Hang Up, the call on hold is also ended.
i
On some mobile phones, the call on hold is
activated as soon as the active call is ended.
Conference call
You can interconnect active and held calls. This
permits several parties to hear one another and
speak with one another. This function depends
on your mobile phone network provider and the
mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating
instructions).
X
Add a call (Y page 98).
or
X
Answer an incoming call (Y page 100).
X
To select Conference in the telephone menu:
turn and press the controller.
The new participant is included in the confer-
ence call. Conference
is displayed in the tele-
phone menu.
Incoming call during an existing call
(call waiting)
The call waiting function depends on your
mobile phone network provider and your mobile
phone. Depending on the mobile phone used,
behavior when answering a call may vary (see
the manufacturer's operating instructions).
Call waiting: if you receive a call while already
in a call, a message is shown. You also hear a
tone. You can decide whether to accept or reject
the call.
Accepting
X
To select w Accept: press the controller.
or
X
Press 6 on the multifunction steering
wheel.
The incoming call is active, the previously
active call is on hold. You can switch back and
forth between both calls (call waiting)
(
Y page 99).
i
Depending on the mobile phone, you may
also be able to accept the incoming call (call
waiting) on your mobile phone. This function
and behavior depends on your mobile phone
network provider and the mobile phone (see
the manufacturer's operating instructions).
Rejecting
X
To select = Reject: turn and press the
controller.
or
X
Press ~ on the multifunction steering
wheel.
The behavior after the call is rejected depends
on your mobile phone and mobile phone net-
work provider.
Option 1: The originally active call is contin-
ued and the incoming call is rejected.
Option 2: The originally active call is ended
and the incoming call is accepted.
Option 3: Both calls are ended.
Ending an active call
X
To select = in the telephone menu: turn
and press the controller.
or
X
Press ~ on the multifunction steering
wheel.
The active call is ended.
Mobile phone voice recognition
You can start or end voice recognition on your
mobile phone with this function. Further infor-
mation on the voice recognition service (see the
manufacturer's operating instructions).
100
Mobile phone voice recognition
Telephone
Starting the mobile phone voice recognition
X
Connect the mobile phone to the multimedia
system (
Y page 92).
X
Press and hold the ó button on the multi-
function steering wheel for more than one
second.
You can now use the mobile phone voice rec-
ognition.
Ending the mobile phone voice recognition
X
Press ñ on the multifunction steering
wheel.
The mobile phone voice recognition is stop-
ped.
Phone book
Introduction
The phone book displays the contacts from the
address book which have a phone number.
The phone book of the mobile phone is auto-
matically displayed in the multimedia system
after the connection is established (default set-
ting). You can deactivate automatic calling up
(
Y page 108).
In the phone book, you can:
R
Create new contacts (Y page 102)
R
Add information to contacts (Y page 102)
R
Search for contacts (Y page 101)
R
Store contacts (Y page 103)
R
Delete contacts (Y page 103)
Further information on importing contacts
(
Y page 109).
When you import, save, edit or add contacts,
they will be permanently saved in the multime-
dia system. These contacts will remain available
even when you connect the multimedia system
to a different mobile phone. You can view these
contacts even without a mobile phone.
Calling up the phone book
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To select the symbol in the telephone
menu: turn and press the controller.
If the phone book contains contacts, they will
be displayed in alphabetical order. The char-
acter bar at the bottom of the display is active.
You can now search for a contact
(
Y page 101).
Further information on the symbols shown
(
Y page 101).
i
You can also call up the phone book with the
multifunction steering wheel; see the vehicle
Operator's Manual.
Symbol overview
Sym-
bol
Explanation
Æ
Contact that has been entered, edi-
ted or saved in the multimedia sys-
tem
\
Contact with voice tag
These contacts have also been
assigned a voice tag. For more infor-
mation, see the separate operating
instructions.
Ã
Contact that was called up from a
mobile phone
¯
Contact imported from the SD mem-
ory card or USB device
®
Contact imported via the Bluetooth
®
interface
Searching for a contact
Using the character bar
You determine the first letter of the contact you
are looking for with the first character you enter.
X
To select characters: turn the controller and
press to confirm.
The first contact with the selected first char-
acter is highlighted in the phone book. If there
are similar contacts, the next different char-
acter is shown. For example, with contacts
such as Jana
and John, the beginnings of the
names are identical. The next different char-
acter A
and O are offered for selection.
X
Select the characters of the contact you are
searching for one by one, pressing and con-
firming with the controller each time.
Phone book
101
Telephone
Z
X
To select ¬: turn and press the controller.
The contacts in the phone book are displayed.
X
To select a contact: turn and press the con-
troller.
The G symbol indicates that a contact contains
more than one phone number.
X
To select a contact with the G symbol: turn
the controller and press to confirm.
The phone numbers are displayed. The G
symbol changes to I.
Back to the character bar
X
Press the % button repeatedly until the
character bar is displayed.
Information about character entry (
Y page 30).
Using the touchpad
You determine the first letter of the contact you
are looking for with the first character you enter.
X
Draw the letter on the touchpad surface.
The first contact with the selected first char-
acter is highlighted in the phone book.
Further information on handwriting recogni-
tion on the touchpad (
Y page 26).
X
Draw additional letters on the touchpad sur-
face one after another.
X
To complete the search and return to the
phone book: press the touchpad.
X
To select and call the contact: glide up or
down and press.
Using the multifunction steering wheel
X
Dial a number from the phone book; see the
vehicle Operator's Manual.
Displaying the details of a contact
X
To highlight a contact in the phone book: turn
the controller.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Details: turn and press the con-
troller.
The detailed view appears.
Closing the detailed display
X
To select %: slide 8 the controller.
Adding a new contact
X
Slide 5 the controller repeatedly in the
phone book until the selection list appears.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select New: turn and press the controller.
X
To select a category for the number, e.g.
Home
: turn the controller and press to confirm.
X
To select a telephone category, e.g. Mobile
Phone: turn the controller and press to con-
firm.
If you have marked a number as favored, it
appears at the top of the list and is highligh-
ted.
X
To select Continue: turn and press the con-
troller.
The input menu with input lines is displayed.
X
Enter characters using the controller
(
Y page 30) or the touchpad (Y page 26).
X
To finish and save an entry: select ¬.
The contact is created in the phone book and
in the address book.
Adding information to a contact
You can add a telephone number to an existing
contact.
102
Phone book
Telephone
X
To highlight a contact in the phone book: turn
the controller.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Add Phone No.: turn and press the
controller.
X
To select a category for the number, e.g.
Home
: turn the controller and press to confirm.
X
To select a telephone category, e.g. Mobile
Phone: turn the controller and press to con-
firm.
If you have marked a number as favored, it
appears at the top of the list and is highligh-
ted.
X
To select Continue: turn and press the con-
troller.
An input line appears.
X
Enter the telephone number.
X
Select ¬.
A maximum of five entries can be saved for one
category.
If five numbers are already stored for the entry
you are searching for, a prompt will appear ask-
ing whether you wish to overwrite one of the
existing numbers.
Overwriting an entry
X
To select Yes: turn and press the controller.
A list of the existing five phone numbers is
displayed.
X
To select the number to be overwritten from
the list: turn the controller and press to con-
firm.
The entry field for the new phone number is
displayed.
X
Enter characters using the controller
(
Y page 30) or the touchpad (Y page 26).
Canceling the overwriting of an entry
X
To select No: turn and press the controller.
The process is canceled.
Saving a contact
Saved contacts are indicated in the phone book
by different symbols (
Y page 101).
X
Search for a contact on the mobile phone
à (
Y page 101).
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Save: turn and press the controller.
The contact has now been saved. The contact
is identified by the Æ symbol in the phone
book.
i
Saved contacts are also displayed in the
address book.
Saving or editing the contact data in the mul-
timedia system does not change the contacts
on the mobile phone. If automatic calling-up
of phone contacts is activated, the multime-
dia system displays the copy Æ with the
changed data.
To add additional data, such as additional
phone numbers or e-mail addresses, select
this contact. In this way, you avoid creating
additional copies of the mobile phone entry.
Deleting a name
You can delete contacts that have been added,
supplemented, saved or imported in the multi-
media system.
If there are only phone numbers saved under the
contact, the contact is deleted from the phone
book and the address book.
If there are additional entries under the contact,
such as a navigable destination, only the phone
numbers are deleted. The contact is retained in
the address book with the remaining entries.
X
To highlight a contact in the phone book: turn
the controller.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Delete Entry: turn and press the
controller.
A prompt appears asking whether the contact
should be deleted.
X
To select Yes: turn and press the controller.
The phone number is deleted.
Closing the phone book
X
To select & from the character bar: turn the
controller and press to confirm.
or
X
Press the % button.
Phone book
103
Telephone
Z
Address book
Introduction
Always pay attention to traffic conditions.
Familiarize yourself with the address book func-
tions before beginning your journey.
You can use the multimedia system when the
road and traffic conditions permit. You could
otherwise become involved in an accident in
which you or others could be injured.
The address book displays all the contacts from
the various sources (mobile phone, memory
card, USB device, the phone book of the multi-
media system, navigation).
You can use the contacts to make telephone
calls, navigate and to write messages.
If a mobile phone is connected to the multimedia
system and automatic calling up is activated
(
Y page 108), the mobile phone's contacts are
displayed in the address book. If you disconnect
the mobile phone from the multimedia system,
these contacts are no longer displayed in the
address book.
When you import, save, edit or add contacts,
they will be saved in the multimedia system.
These contacts will remain available even when
you connect the multimedia system to a differ-
ent mobile phone. You can view these contacts
even without a mobile phone.
i The address book can store a total of 5,000
contacts:
R
2000 entries are reserved for permanently
saved contacts
R
3000 entries are reserved for contacts that
you can load from the mobile phone
i
Before selling your vehicle, delete the con-
tacts saved in the multimedia system using
the reset function (
Y page 43).
Calling up the address book
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To display the main function bar: slide 5 the
controller.
X
To select Phone: turn and press the controller.
X
To select Address Book: turn and press the
controller.
X
To browse in the address book: turn the con-
troller.
An address book entry can also include a pic-
ture. This is shown to the left of the address
data. Address book entries with pictures can
only be created by importing vCards (vcf
files). Further information on importing
vCards (
Y page 109). The quality of the pic-
ture depends on the picture's resolution.
Searching for a contact
Using the character bar
X
Call up the address book (Y page 104).
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Search: turn and press the control-
ler.
X
To select characters: turn the controller and
press to confirm.
The first contact with the selected first char-
acter is highlighted in the phone book. If there
are similar contacts, the next different char-
acter is shown. For example, with contacts
such as Jana
and John, the beginnings of the
names are identical. The next different char-
acter A
and O are offered for selection.
104
Address book
Telephone
X
Select the characters of the contact you are
searching for one by one, pressing and con-
firming with the controller each time.
X
To complete the search: slide 5 the con-
troller repeatedly until the character bar dis-
appears.
or
X
To select ¬: turn and press the controller.
The contacts in the address book are dis-
played.
X
To select a contact: turn and press the con-
troller.
Information about character entry (
Y page 30).
Using the touchpad
X
Call up the address book (Y page 104).
X
To switch to the menu bar: glide down.
X
Select Search.
X
Draw the letter on the touchpad surface.
The first contact with the selected first char-
acter is highlighted in the address book.
Further information on handwriting recogni-
tion on the touchpad (
Y page 26).
X
Draw additional letters on the touchpad sur-
face one after another.
X
To complete the search and return to the
phone book: press the touchpad.
X
To select and call the contact: glide up or
down and press.
Adding a new contact
You can enter address data directly into the
address book. If you store telephone numbers in
the phone book of the multimedia system, these
are also saved in the address book. If you store
a navigation destination, the multimedia system
creates an address book entry that includes the
complete navigable address data.
X
Call up the address book (Y page 104).
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select New: turn and press the controller.
The surname and first name input lines are
displayed.
X
Enter characters using the controller
(
Y page 30) or the touchpad (Y page 26).
X
To save the surname and first name: select
¬.
The details for the contact are displayed.
X
To add a desired entry (e.g. Add E-Mail
Address): turn and press the controller.
Depending on the type of entry, the corre-
sponding input menu appears.
X
Enter characters using the controller
(
Y page 30) or the touchpad (Y page 26).
X
To finish and save an entry: select ¬.
Displaying contact details
X
Call up the address book (Y page 104).
X
To select a contact: turn and press the con-
troller.
The details for the contact are displayed.
The entries can be categorized as follows:
\
Business details
6
Home details
i An address book entry can contain the fol-
lowing information:
R
name
R
first name
R
company
R
up to five telephone numbers
R
two email addresses
R
Internet address
R
two addresses
R
two navigation addresses (transferred from
navigation(
Y page 58))
R
geo-coordinates
Address book
105
Telephone
Z
Adding information to a contact
X
Call up the address book (Y page 104).
X
To select a contact: turn and press the con-
troller.
The details for the contact are displayed.
X
To add a desired entry (e.g. Add E-Mail
Address): turn and press the controller.
Depending on the type of entry, the corre-
sponding input menu appears.
X
Enter characters using the controller
(
Y page 30) or the touchpad (Y page 26).
X
To finish and save an entry: select ¬.
A maximum of five telephone numbers can be
saved for one contact.
Starting route guidance to an address
or geo-coordinates
If an address with a ZIP code is saved, the
address can be used for route guidance. If the
ZIP code cannot be assigned to an exact
address, you can adjust the destination subse-
quently using the controller.
X
Call up the address book (Y page 104).
X
To select a contact: turn and press the con-
troller.
The details for the contact are displayed.
X
To select an address: turn and press the con-
troller.
or
X
To select an entry with geo-coordinates: turn
and press the controller.
The navigation menu is displayed.
X
To select Start Route Guidance: slide 6
and press the controller.
The route to the destination address is calcu-
lated and route guidance starts.
Making a call
X
Call up the address book (Y page 104).
X
To select a contact: turn and press the con-
troller.
The details for the contact are displayed.
X
To select a telephone number: turn and press
the controller.
The number is dialed. Further information
about the functions during a call (
Y page 98).
Sending text messages
X
Call up the address book (Y page 104).
X
To select a contact: turn and press the con-
troller.
The details for the contact are displayed.
X
To highlight the telephone number: turn the
controller.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Send Text Message: turn and
press the controller.
The entry fields for a text message are dis-
played (
Y page 116).
Observe the requirements for the message func-
tion (
Y page 113).
Sending an e-mail
X
Call up the address book (Y page 104).
X
Select an entry: turn and press the controller.
The details for the contact are displayed.
X
To select an e-mail address: turn and press
the controller.
The entry fields for an e-mail are displayed
(
Y page 116).
Observe the requirements for the message func-
tion (
Y page 113).
Displaying sub-entry information
X
Call up the address book (Y page 104).
X
Select an entry: turn and press the controller.
The details for the contact are displayed.
X
To highlight the desired entry: turn the con-
troller.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Details: turn and press the con-
troller.
The display is shown in full.
106
Address book
Telephone
Editing a contact
X
Call up the address book (Y page 104).
X
To select a contact: turn and press the con-
troller.
The details for the contact are displayed.
X
To highlight the desired entry: turn the con-
troller.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Edit: turn and press the controller.
The entry field for the selected entry is dis-
played.
Information about character entry (
Y page 30).
Changing the category of an entry
X
Call up the address book (Y page 104).
X
Select an entry: turn and press the controller.
The details for the contact are displayed.
X
To highlight the desired entry: turn the con-
troller.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Change Category: turn and press
the controller.
X
To select a category: turn the controller and
press to confirm.
Storing the phone number as a speed
dial number
X
Call up the address book (Y page 104).
X
Select an entry: turn and press the controller.
The details for the contact are displayed.
X
To highlight the desired telephone number:
turn the controller.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Speed Dial: turn and press the
controller.
X
To select Assign Speed Dial Preset: turn
and press the controller.
X
To select a memory position for the speed
dial: turn and press the controller.
The phone number has been saved as a speed
dial.
Voice tags
Introduction
You can enter voice tags via the Voice Control
System (see the separate operating instruc-
tions). Once you have assigned a voice tag to an
address book entry, you can call up this entry
with a voice command and dial a phone number,
for example. You can add one voice tag per
address book entry.
Adding a voice tag
X
Call up the address book (Y page 104).
X
Search for an address book entry with or with-
out a voice tag ¦ (
Y page 104).
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Voice Tag: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Add: turn and press the controller.
Subsequent operation is voice-controlled.
The Voice Control System guides you through
the dialogs.
Deleting a voice tag
X
Call up the address book (Y page 104).
X
Search for an address book entry with a voice
tag (
Y page 104).
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Voice Tag: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Delete: turn and press the control-
ler.
X
To select Yes: turn and press the controller.
The voice tag is deleted.
Listening to a voice tag
X
Search for an address book entry with a voice
tag (
Y page 104).
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
Address book
107
Telephone
Z
X
To select Voice Tag: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Listen: turn and press the control-
ler.
You hear the voice tag.
Changing the display and sorting cri-
teria for contacts
X
Call up the address book (Y page 104).
X
To show the menu bar: slide 6 the control-
ler.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Display and Sorting: turn and
press the controller.
You have the following options:
R
Last Name, First Name (default setting)
The contacts are sorted by surname and dis-
played with a comma.
R
Last Name First Name
The contacts are sorted by surname and dis-
played without a comma.
R
First Name Last Name
The contacts are sorted by first name and dis-
played without a comma.
X
To select the required option: turn and press
the controller.
The contacts are sorted and displayed
according to the selection.
Automatically importing contacts
from the phone
Depending on the mobile phone used, you can
set whether the contacts should be called up
automatically after the mobile phone is connec-
ted to the multimedia system.
X
Connect a mobile phone (Y page 92).
X
Call up the address book (Y page 104).
X
To show the menu bar: slide 6 the control-
ler.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Automatically Import Con‐
tacts from Phone: turn and press the con-
troller.
You can allow O or deactivate ª the auto-
matic download.
Saving a contact
Saved contacts are indicated in the phone book
by different symbols (
Y page 101).
X
Call up the address book (Y page 104).
X
To select a contact: turn and press the con-
troller.
The details for the contact are displayed.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Save: turn and press the controller.
The contact has now been saved.
i
If the saved address book entry contains a
phone number, the entry is also displayed in
the phone book.
Saving or editing the contact data in the mul-
timedia system does not change the contacts
on the mobile phone. If automatic download-
ing of phone contacts is activated, the multi-
media system displays the copy ¥ with the
changed data. To add additional data, such as
additional phone numbers or e-mail
addresses, select this contact. In this way,
you avoid creating additional copies of the
mobile phone entry.
Deleting a name
X
Call up the address book (Y page 104).
X
Search for a contact (Y page 104).
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Delete Entry: turn and press the
controller.
X
To select Yes: turn and press the controller.
The contact is deleted.
108
Address book
Telephone
Importing contacts
Information and requirements
Contacts can be imported as vCards (vcf files). A
vCard is an electronic business card. A memory
card, USB device or a Bluetooth
®
connection
can be used for importing.
i
Up to 2000 entries can be imported into the
address book. A message notifies you when
the maximum number is reached. In order to
be able to then import new contacts, you have
to delete existing contacts (
Y page 108).
Source Requirements
Memory card The SD card is inserted. It
contains importable contact
details.
USB device The USB device is inserted
into the USB port. It contains
importable contact details.
Bluetooth
®
connection
If the sending of vCards is
supported via Bluetooth
®
,
vCards can be received on
mobile phones or netbooks,
for example.
Bluetooth
®
must be activa-
ted in the multimedia system
and on the respective device;
see the manufacturer's oper-
ating instructions.
i
If automatic calling up of the contacts is
deactivated (
Y page 108), the Import from
Phone option is available.
Importing from the memory card or USB
device
Contacts imported from the memory card or
from a USB device are identified by the ¯
symbol.
The following conditions must be fulfilled in
order to import vCards:
R
vCards (vcf files) may be located in the main
directory or in folders. The multimedia system
allows for a targeted selection of the corre-
sponding directories.
R
vCards must have the file extension "vcf".
i
The multimedia system supports vCards in
versions 2.1 and 3.0.
X
To switch to the menu bar in the telephone
menu or the address book: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Download Contacts: turn and
press the controller.
X
To select From Memory Card or From USB
device: turn and press the controller.
Receiving vCards via Bluetooth
®
Multimedia system
X
To switch to the menu bar in the telephone
menu or the address book: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Download Contacts: turn and
press the controller.
X
To select From Bluetooth Device: turn and
press the controller.
If the multimedia system is connected to a
mobile phone, the connection is terminated.
vCards can now be received by a device (PC,
mobile phone) via Bluetooth
®
.
External device
X
Start the data transfer; see the manufactur-
er's operating instructions.
The number of vCards received is displayed in
the multimedia system.
Multimedia system
X
To cancel the transfer: press the controller.
If a mobile phone was connected, the con-
nection to the mobile phone is established
again.
Address book
109
Telephone
Z
Received vCards are identified by the ®
symbol in the address book.
i
If you switch to another main function, e.g.
navigation, while receiving vCards, the recep-
tion of vCards will be terminated.
Deleting imported contacts
X
To change to the menu bar when in the
address book or the telephone menu: slide
6 the controller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Delete Contacts: turn and press
the controller.
X
Select one of the following options:
R
Internal Contacts
R
Imported from Storage Device
R
Imported from Bluetooth Devices
R
Downloaded from Phone
Turn and press the controller.
X
To select Yes: turn and press the controller.
The contacts are deleted.
Closing the address book
X
Press the % button one or more times.
Call lists
Introduction
If your mobile phone supports the PBAP Blue-
tooth
®
profile, the call lists from the mobile
phone are displayed in the multimedia system.
When connecting the mobile phone, you may
have to confirm the connection for the PBAP
Bluetooth
®
profile.
If your mobile phone does not support the PBAP
Bluetooth
®
profile, the multimedia system gen-
erates its own call lists. These are not the same
as the call lists in your mobile phone.
The call lists option is not available unless a
mobile phone is connected to the multimedia
system.
If the contact for an incoming call is not saved in
the address book, you can use the call list to
save the telephone number. You can save this
telephone number as a new contact in the
address book or add it to an existing contact
(
Y page 111).
i
If you connect a different mobile phone to
the multimedia system, the call lists from the
new mobile phone are displayed.
Opening the call list and selecting an
entry
Example: list of selected phone numbers
:
Date and time (if available)
;
Telephone number of the highlighted entry
and symbols (if assigned)
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Call Lists: turn and press the
controller.
X
To select Calls Received or Calls Dialed:
turn and press the controller.
The relevant list is displayed.
X
To select an entry and make a call: turn and
press the controller.
Closing the call list
X
To select & to the left of the list: slide 8
the controller and press to confirm.
or
X
Press the % button.
The list is closed.
Displaying details from a list entry
Abbreviated list entries can also be shown in full.
110
Call lists
Telephone
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Call Lists: turn and press the
controller.
X
To select Calls Received or Calls Dialed:
turn and press the controller.
The relevant list is displayed.
X
To highlight the desired entry: turn the con-
troller.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Details: turn and press the con-
troller.
The details are displayed.
X
To go back to the list: slide 8 the controller
repeatedly until the list is highlighted.
Saving telephone numbers
Adding new entries to the address book
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Call Lists: turn and press the
controller.
X
To select Calls Received or Calls Dialed:
turn and press the controller.
The relevant list is displayed.
X
To highlight the desired telephone number:
turn the controller.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Save: turn and press the controller.
X
Select New Entry.
X
Select a number category, e.g. Home.
X
Select a telephone category, e.g. Mobile
Phone.
The selected category is marked with #.
If you have marked a number as Preferred
, it
is shown at the top of the list and is highligh-
ted.
X
Select Continue.
The entry field for the name of the new con-
tact is displayed. The entry field for the tele-
phone number is filled in automatically.
X
Enter characters using the controller
(
Y page 30) or the touchpad (Y page 26).
X
To finish and save an entry: select ¬.
The new contact has been created.
Adding information to an address book
entry
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Call Lists: turn and press the
controller.
X
To select Calls Received or Calls Dialed:
turn and press the controller.
The relevant list is displayed.
X
To highlight the desired telephone number:
turn the controller.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Save: turn and press the controller.
X
Select Add Phone No..
X
Select a number category, e.g. Home.
X
Select a telephone category, e.g. Mobile
Phone.
X
Select Continue.
The address book is displayed.
X
Search for the desired contact (Y page 104).
X
Press the controller when you have finished
searching.
The telephone number has been saved.
A maximum of five telephone numbers can be
saved for one contact.
If five numbers are already stored for the entry
you are searching for, a prompt will appear ask-
ing whether you wish to overwrite one of the
existing numbers.
Call lists
111
Telephone
Z
Overwriting an entry
X
To select Yes: turn and press the controller.
A list of the existing five numbers is displayed.
X
To select the number to be overwritten from
the list: turn the controller and press to con-
firm.
The entry is overwritten with the new tele-
phone number.
Canceling the overwriting of an entry
X
To select No: turn and press the controller.
The process is canceled.
Deleting call lists
Call lists which are generated and managed by
the multimedia system can be deleted in the
multimedia system.
You cannot delete call lists from the multimedia
system which are displayed on a mobile phone
that supports the PBAP Bluetooth
®
.
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Call Lists: turn and press the
controller.
X
Select Delete Call Lists.
A prompt appears asking whether you wish to
delete all call lists.
X
To select Yes: turn and press the controller.
The call lists are deleted.
i
If you delete call lists from the mobile phone
(see the manufacturer's operating instruc-
tions), the multimedia system updates the
call list display the next time it connects.
Speed dial lists
Setting up
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To call up the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Call Lists: turn and press the
controller.
X
Select Speed Dial Preset List.
The speed dial list is displayed.
X
To highlight a memory position for the speed
dial: turn the controller.
If you highlight an entry that already exists in
the speed dial list, this is overwritten with the
new entry.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
Select Assign Speed Dial Preset.
The phone book is displayed.
X
Search for a contact (Y page 101).
X
To select a contact: turn and press the con-
troller.
The phone number has been saved as a speed
dial.
Deleting
Deleting a speed dial preset
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To call up the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Call Lists: turn and press the
controller.
X
Select Speed Dial Preset List.
The speed dial list is displayed.
X
To highlight the memory position you want to
delete: turn the controller.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Delete Speed Dial Preset: turn
and press the controller.
X
To select Yes: turn and press the controller.
The speed dial preset has been deleted.
Deleting all speed dial presets
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To call up the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Call Lists: turn and press the
controller.
X
Select Speed Dial Preset List.
The speed dial list is displayed.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Delete All Speed Dial Pre‐
sets: turn and press the controller.
X
To select Yes: turn and press the controller.
All speed dials are deleted.
112
Speed dial lists
Telephone
Messages
General notes
New messages are identified by the / sym-
bol in the display of the multimedia system and
an audible signal. Once you have read all the
messages, the symbol is no longer displayed.
The multimedia system displays the 100 newest
text messages and e-mails.
The ú symbol is displayed when the mobile
phone's message memory is full. The symbol is
no longer displayed if you delete messages on
the mobile phone.
Function restrictions
Text messages cannot be written while the vehi-
cle is in motion.
Requirements
To use the message functions, the connected
mobile phone must support the MAP Bluetooth
®
profile. The prompt for the MAP Bluetooth
®
pro-
file may have to be confirmed on the mobile
phone.
With some mobile phones, some settings still
have to be made after connecting to the multi-
media system (see the manufacturer's operat-
ing instructions). The messages are then dis-
played the next time you connect to the multi-
media system.
An e-mail account must be set up on the mobile
phone for the e-mail function (see the manufac-
turer’s operating instructions).
To read and write e-mails in the multimedia sys-
tem, the e-mail account first needs to be con-
figured (
Y page 114).
Some mobile phones with the MAP Bluetooth
®
profile:
R
only show new text messages
R
do not support the deleting or editing of text
messages
R
do not support the drafts folder for text mes-
sages
R
do not support the sending of text messages
R
do not support the e-mail function
R
do not send messages when in a locked sta-
tus
Not all mobile phones available on the market
are equally suitable. Further information about
settings and supported functions of Bluetooth
®
-
capable mobile phones can be found on the
Internet at
http://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect.
Or call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) (for the USA) or Customer
Relations at 1-800-387-0100 (for Canada).
Settings
Calling up the settings menu for mes-
sages
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select 1: turn and press the controller.
The message menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Settings : turn and press the con-
troller.
The text message settings and the available e-
mail accounts of the connected mobile phone
will be displayed.
Configuring the text messages dis-
played
X
Call up the settings menu for messages
(
Y page 113).
X
To highlight Text Message: turn the control-
ler.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
A menu with the following options is shown:
R
All Messages
R
New Messages
R
Off
The messages are not displayed automati-
cally. You can display the 100 newest text
messages from the mobile phone using the
Download
option in the message menu.
X
To select the required option: turn and press
the controller.
Messages
113
Telephone
Z
Configuring the e-mails displayed
X
Call up the settings menu for messages
(
Y page 113).
X
To highlight an e-mail account: turn the con-
troller.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
A menu with the following options is shown:
R
All Messages
R
New Messages
R
Off
The messages are not displayed automati-
cally. You can also display the 100 newest
e-mails using the Download
option in the
message menu.
X
To select the required option: turn and press
the controller.
Configuring an e-mail account
X
Call up the settings menu for messages
(
Y page 113).
X
To select an e-mail account: turn and press
the controller.
The e-mail account is now configured. E-mails
can now be received and sent in the multi-
media system.
Deactivating the e-mail function
X
Call up the settings menu for messages
(
Y page 113).
X
To select E-Mail Off: turn and press the
controller.
E-mail reception is deactivated.
Changing the displayed name of the e-
mail account
Some mobile phones:
R
do not support the changing of the displayed
name
R
support only the e-mail address of the e-mail
account
X
Call up the settings menu for messages
(
Y page 113).
X
To highlight an e-mail account: turn the con-
troller.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Own E-Mail Address: turn and
press the controller.
The input menu for entering your own e-mail
address is displayed.
Downloading messages manually
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select 1: turn and press the controller.
The message menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Download: turn and press the con-
troller.
Downloading text messages and e-mails
from the phone
X
Select From the Phone.
The messages are downloaded.
If you have selected Automatic
Download in
the e-mail settings, manual downloading is
not possible.
Updating from the e-mail server by the
mobile phone
X
Select From the E-Mail Server.
The e-mails in the mobile phone are updated.
This function is not supported by all mobile
phones.
Reading messages
In the message menu
The message menu contains all the unread text
messages and e-mails. If the corresponding
114
Messages
Telephone
folder is called up, the messages are sorted by
text messages and e-mails and displayed.
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select 1: turn and press the controller.
The message menu is displayed with the
unread messages.
X
To select the message: turn and press the
controller.
The message text is displayed.
X
To close the message text: press the %
button.
If you want to read messages that have already
been read again, you have to call up the corre-
sponding message folder (
Y page 115).
In the message folder
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select 1: turn and press the controller.
The message menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Folder: turn and press the control-
ler.
X
To select Text Message or E-Mail: turn and
press the controller.
The selected folder is displayed.
X
To select the message: turn and press the
controller.
The message is displayed.
X
To scroll through the message or select phone
numbers in the text: turn the controller.
The display scrolls up or down line by line, or
skips to the next or previous telephone num-
ber and automatically highlights it.
X
To return to the list: press %.
The following sub-folders can be selected
for text messages and e-mails:
R
Inbox
This folder contains all the incoming mes-
sages.
R
Outbox
This folder contains all the outgoing mes-
sages.
R
Drafts
This folder contains all the messages that you
have saved as a draft.
i
Folders cannot be selected if they are
empty.
Depending on the mobile phone used, the sub-
folder function may be available.
Read-aloud function for messages
X
To start the read-aloud function: press the
controller when the message is displayed.
X
To select Read Aloud: turn and press the
controller.
The multimedia system reads the message
aloud.
X
To cancel the read-aloud function: press the
8 button.
or
X
Press the controller, select Cancel Read-
Aloud Function and press the controller
again.
You can set the language (
Y page 40) and the
speed (
Y page 37) of the read-aloud function.
Displaying details and phone numbers
The multimedia system can also show a short-
ened sender display in full.
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select 1: turn and press the controller.
The message menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Folder: turn and press the control-
ler.
X
To select Text Message or E-Mail: turn and
press the controller.
The selected folder is displayed.
X
To highlight the desired message: turn the
controller.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Details: turn and press the con-
troller.
The detailed view appears.
Messages
115
Telephone
Z
X
To close the detailed display: slide 8 the
controller.
X
To return to the telephone menu: press the
% button.
Writing text messages
Writing a new text message
Observe the requirements for the message func-
tion (
Y page 113).
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select 1: turn and press the controller.
The message menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select New: turn and press the controller.
X
To select Text Message: turn and press the
controller.
The text message input menu is displayed.
The To:
input line is selected.
Entering a recipient
X
Enter characters using the controller
(
Y page 30) or the touchpad (Y page 26).
or
X
To enter a phone number from the phone
book: select Æ.
The contacts from the address book which
have a phone number are displayed.
X
Search for and select an entry (Y page 101).
The number is copied to the recipient line.
Entering text and sending text messages
X
To select an input line for text: select 5 in the
character bar.
X
Enter characters.
The multimedia system contains templates
which you can use to compile your messages
(
Y page 117).
X
To send the text message: select OK.
Answering a text message
Observe the requirements for the message func-
tion (
Y page 113).
X
Display the message (Y page 114).
X
Press the controller.
X
To select Reply: turn and press the controller.
The text message input menu is displayed.
The addressee's details are automatically fil-
led in using the details in the original mes-
sage.
Writing e-mails
Writing a new e-mail
Observe the requirements for the message func-
tion (
Y page 113).
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select 1: turn and press the controller.
The message menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select New: turn and press the controller.
X
To select E-Mail: turn and press the control-
ler.
The e-mail input menu appears. The To:
input
line is selected.
116
Messages
Telephone
Entering a recipient
X
Enter characters using the controller
(
Y page 30) or the touchpad (Y page 26).
or
X
To insert an e-mail address from the address
book: select Æ.
The contacts from the address book which
have an e-mail address are displayed.
X
Search for and select an entry (Y page 101).
The e-mail address is copied to the addressee
line.
Entering the subject
X
To select the Subject: input line: select 5 in
the character bar.
X
Enter characters.
Entering text and sending e-mails
X
To select an input line for text: select 5 in the
character bar.
X
Enter characters.
The multimedia system contains templates
which you can use to compile your messages
(
Y page 117).
X
To send the e-mail: select OK.
Answering an e-mail
Observe the requirements for the message func-
tion (
Y page 113).
X
Display the message (Y page 114).
X
To call up a menu: press the controller.
X
To select Reply: turn and press the controller.
The e-mail input menu appears. The addres-
see's details are automatically filled in using
the details in the original message.
When replying to an e-mail, you can also select
Reply to All
instead of Reply. In this case,
the reply is sent not just to the sender but to all
those who received the original message.
Forwarding an e-mail
Observe the requirements for the message func-
tion (
Y page 113).
X
Display the message (Y page 114).
X
To call up a menu: press the controller.
X
To select Forward: turn and press the con-
troller.
The input menu appears. The subject line is
automatically filled in with the same details as
those in the original message.
Text templates
Using text templates
:
Displays text templates
X
Select the input line for a text message
(
Y page 116) or e-mail (Y page 116).
X
To select text templates : in the character
bar: turn and press the controller.
The text templates are displayed.
X
To select and insert a text template: turn and
press the controller.
The text template is inserted into the text
message or e-mail.
Editing text templates
:
Displays text templates
Messages
117
Telephone
Z
X
Select the input line for a text message
(
Y page 116) or e-mail (Y page 116).
X
To select text templates : in the character
bar: turn and press the controller.
The text templates are displayed.
X
To highlight the text template to be edited:
turn the controller.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Edit: turn and press the controller.
The text template is displayed in an input line.
X
Edit the text template as desired. Further
information on character entry using the con-
troller (
Y page 30) and on handwriting recog-
nition on the touchpad (
Y page 26).
X
To adopt changes to the text template, select
¬: turn and press the controller.
The text template has been changed.
Calling a text message sender
X
Display a message in the message menu
(
Y page 114)or message folder (Y page 115).
X
To call up a menu: press the controller.
X
To select Call Sender: turn and press the
controller.
The call is made.
Using a phone number in the text
Numbers in text messages that are highlighted
can be used.
X
To highlight and select a usable phone num-
ber while the message is displayed: turn and
press the controller.
X
To select Use: press the controller.
X
To select Call: turn and press the controller.
The call is made.
i
It is possible that a highlighted numerical
sequence may not contain a telephone num-
ber.
Storing the sender as a new entry in
the address book
Storing the sender of a text message
X
To call up the menu when a text message is
displayed: press the controller.
X
To select Save Number: turn and press the
controller.
X
To select New Entry: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select a number category, e.g. Home.
X
Select a telephone category, e.g. Mobile
Phone.
X
Select Continue.
The input line for the name of the new contact
is displayed. The input line for the telephone
number is filled in automatically.
X
Enter characters using the controller
(
Y page 30) or the touchpad (Y page 26).
X
To finish the entry: select OK.
The new contact has been created.
Saving the sender of an e-mail
X
To call up the menu when an e-mail is dis-
played: press the controller.
X
To select Save Sender's E-Mail Address:
turn and press the controller.
X
To select New Entry: turn and press the con-
troller.
The input line for the name of the new contact
is displayed. The input line for the e-mail
address is filled in automatically.
X
Enter characters using the controller
(
Y page 30) or the touchpad (Y page 26).
X
To finish the entry: select OK.
The new contact has been created.
Adding the sender to an address book
entry
Storing the sender of a text message
X
To call up the menu when a text message is
displayed: press the controller.
X
To select Save Number: turn and press the
controller.
X
To select Add Phone Number: turn and press
the controller.
118
Messages
Telephone
X
To select a category for the number, e.g.
Home
: turn the controller and press to confirm.
X
To select a telephone category, e.g. Mobile
Phone: turn the controller and press to con-
firm.
X
To select Continue: turn and press the con-
troller.
The address book is displayed.
X
Search for the desired entry (Y page 104).
X
Press the controller when you have finished
searching.
The telephone number has been added.
A maximum of five entries can be saved for
one category.
Saving the sender of an e-mail
X
To call up the menu when an e-mail is dis-
played: press the controller.
X
To select Save Sender's E-Mail Address:
turn and press the controller.
X
To select Add: turn and press the controller.
The address book is displayed.
X
Search for the desired entry (Y page 104).
X
Press the controller when you have finished
searching.
The e-mail address has been added.
Deleting messages
X
Call up the message folder (Y page 115).
X
To select the message: turn and press the
controller.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Delete: turn and press the control-
ler.
X
To select Yes: turn and press the controller.
The message is deleted.
i
This delete function is not supported by all
mobile phones. The Delete failed.
mes-
sage then appears.
Messages
119
Telephone
Z
Your multimedia system equipment
These operating instructions describe all the
standard and optional equipment of your multi-
media system, as available at the time of going
to press. Country-specific differences are pos-
sible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not
feature all functions described here. This also
applies to safety-relevant systems and func-
tions.
Read the information on qualified specialist
workshops in the vehicle Operator's Manual.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you operate information systems and com-
munication equipment integrated in the vehi-
cle when driving, you may be distracted from
the traffic situation. You could also lose con-
trol of the vehicle. There is a risk of an acci-
dent.
Only operate this equipment when the traffic
situation permits. If you are not sure that this
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention
to traffic conditions and operate the equip-
ment when the vehicle is stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are driving when operating
the system.
General notes
Connection difficulties while the vehi-
cle is in motion.
If an Internet connection has been established
via a data-enabled mobile phone, the connec-
tion may be lost in the following situations:
R
the mobile phone network coverage is insuf-
ficient.
R
the vehicle has moved into a mobile phone
cell with no free channels.
R
the SIM card used is not compatible with the
network available.
Function restrictions (Canada)
You will not be able to use the Mercedes-Benz
Apps and Internet connection, or will no longer
be able to use them, or may have to wait before
using them, in the following situations:
R
if your mobile phone is switched off
R
if your mobile phone has not been enabled for
Internet access
R
if the Bluetooth
®
function is switched off on
the multimedia system and the desired phone
is supposed to be connected via Bluetooth
®
R
if the Bluetooth
®
function is switched off on
the mobile phone and the phone is supposed
to be connected via Bluetooth
®
R
if the mobile phone is not connected via USB
and the phone is supposed to be connected
via USB
R
if either the mobile phone network or the
mobile phone does not allow simultaneous
use of a phone and an Internet connection
R
if the mobile phone has not been enabled for
Internet access via Bluetooth
®
and/or USB
The driver is not permitted to call up websites
while driving and use of the Mercedes-Benz
Apps is restricted.
i
It is possible that you may not be able to
receive calls when an Interne
t connection is
active. This depends on the mobile phone and
the mobile phone network used.
Conditions for access
USA: to use Mercedes-Benz Apps and Internet
access, mbrace must be activated and opera-
tional. Furthermore, mbrace must be activated
for Mercedes-Benz Apps and Internet access.
Take note of the connection priorities. An emer-
gency call has the highest priority. When a ser-
vice call, e.g. a breakdown service call or the MB
Info Call, is active, an emergency call can still be
initiated. A service call, on the other hand, has
priority over a current Internet connection.
Therefore, you cannot establish an Internet con-
nection during a service call.
Canada: a mobile phone must be connected via
Bluetooth
®
(Y page 92) or USB (Y page 153)
with the multimedia system. Furthermore, you
need a valid mobile service contract with a data
120
Conditions for access
Online and Internet functions
option, which is used to calculate the associated
connection costs.
Conditions for a Bluetooth
®
connection
R
The mobile phone supports at least one of the
Bluetooth
®
profiles DUN (Dial-Up Network-
ing) or PAN (Personal Area Network).
The Bluetooth
®
profiles DUN and PAN enable
the Internet connection of the mobile phone
to be made available to the system.
Conditions for a USB connection
R
The mobile phone supports at least one of the
USB classes:
-
RNDIS (Remote Network Driver Interface
Specification)
-
CDC/NCM (Network Control Model)
-
CDC/ECM (Ethernet Control Model)
-
CDC/ACM (Access Control Model)
The USB classes enable the mobile phone
Internet connection to be made available to
the system.
The terms of use are shown when the system is
used for the first time and then once a year
thereafter. Only read and accept the terms of
use when the vehicle is stationary.
The driver is not permitted to call up websites
while driving and use of the Mercedes-Benz
Apps is restricted.
i
The availability of individual Mercedes-Benz
Apps may vary depending on the country.
Setting up an Internet connection
(Canada)
Procedure and general information
In order to set up a mobile phone for Internet
access, your mobile phone must be connected
to the multimedia system via Bluetooth
®
(Y page 92) or USB (Y page 142).
If you are using Internet access for the first time,
you must enable the connected mobile phone
for Internet access (
Y page 121). If the con-
nected mobile phone supports the Bluetooth
®
PAN profile or the USB classes RNDIS,
CDC/NCM or CDC/ECM, you do not need to
make additional settings. The Internet connec-
tion is established. If the connected mobile
phone does not support the named Bluetooth
®
profile or the named USB classes, predefined
(
Y page 121) or manual access data
(
Y page 122) must be set.
While initializing the mobile phone for the Inter-
net connection, access data which is already on
the mobile phone may be overwritten. You
should therefore check the settings on the
mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating
instructions).
Enabling the mobile phone for Inter-
net access
X
Call up Internet functions (Y page 124).
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Settings: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Configure Internet Settings:
turn and press the controller.
If a mobile phone has already been enabled,
the device list is displayed.
X
To select Start Search: turn and press the
controller.
Mobile phones are displayed that:
R
are connected to the multimedia system
R
fulfill the conditions for the Internet func-
tions
R
have not yet been set up for the Internet
function
X
To select a mobile phone from the device list:
turn the controller and press to confirm.
If the mobile phone supports the Bluetooth
®
PAN profile or the USB classes RNDIS, CDC/
NCM or CDC/ECM, Internet access is set up.
You can use the Internet functions.
If the connected mobile phone does not sup-
port the named Bluetooth
®
profile or the
named USB classes, predefined (
Y page 121)
or manual access data (
Y page 122) must be
set.
Setting access data of the mobile
phone network provider
Selecting the predefined access data of
the mobile phone network provider
X
To select Predefined Settings: turn and
press the controller.
A list of countries appears.
Setting up an Internet connection (Canada)
121
Online and Internet functions
Z
If the mobile phone network provider provides
multiple access data options, the relevant
access data still has to be selected. This
depends on the data package used, for example.
To check whether the predetermined dial-in
data corresponds with the dial-in data provided
by your mobile phone network provider, pro-
ceed as follows (
Y page 123) and select Man‐
ual Settings. The access data is displayed.
The access data for the mobile phone network
provider is selected once for the mobile phone
connected and is loaded again each time the
mobile phone is connected. Establishing a con-
nection (
Y page 124).
You must set the access data of the mobile
phone network provider who provides the SIM
card and the associated data package (access
settings) for the connected mobile phone. The
access data remains the same when you are in a
different country (roaming). The access data of
another network is not selected.
Manually setting the access data of the
mobile phone network provider
X
To select Manual Settings: turn and press
the controller.
An overview of the provider settings appears.
X
Set access data (Y page 122).
X
To select Confirm Settings: turn and press
the controller.
The access data for the mobile phone network
provider is selected once for the mobile phone
connected and is loaded again each time the
mobile phone is connected. Establishing a con-
nection (
Y page 124).
You must set the access data of the mobile
phone network provider who provides the SIM
card and the associated data package (access
settings) for the connected mobile phone. The
access data remains the same when you are in a
different country (roaming). The access data of
another network is not selected.
Setting access data
Set the access data in accordance with your
data package. You can contact your mobile
phone network provider to obtain the precise
access data.
Explanation of the access data
Input field Meaning
Phone Num‐
ber:
Access number for estab-
lishing the connection
The access number
depends on the mobile
phone used. For GSM/
UMTS mobile phones,
*99***1#
is used as a
standard.
Access
Point:
APN network access point
(Access Point Name)
You can obtain this infor-
mation from your mobile
phone network provider.
Entry is not necessary for
all mobile phone network
providers and mobile
phones.
PDP Type:
Internet protocol used.
You can obtain this infor-
mation from your mobile
phone network provider.
User ID:
The user identification can
be obtained from your
mobile phone network pro-
vider.
Entry is not necessary for
all mobile phone network
providers.
Password:
The password can be
obtained from your mobile
phone network provider.
Entry is not necessary for
all mobile phone network
providers.
Auto DNS:
Automatic allocation of
DNS servers is activated. If
the function is deactivated,
the DNS server addresses
must be entered manually.
DNS (Domain Name
Service).
DNS1:
DNS2:
Fields for entering the DNS
server addresses manually.
The address can be
obtained from your mobile
phone network provider.
122
Setting up an Internet connection (Canada)
Online and Internet functions
Managing existing access data
Calling up the device list
X
Call up Internet functions (Y page 124).
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Settings: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Configure Internet Settings:
turn and press the controller.
The device list is displayed.
Editing the access data
The mobile phone must be connected with the
system for the access data to be changed.
When the Internet connection is active, you can-
not edit or delete the access data of the cur-
rently set mobile phone network provider.
X
Call up the device list (Y page 123).
X
To highlight the desired mobile phone in the
device list: turn the controller.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Change Configuration: turn and
press the controller.
X
Select Predefined Settings or Manual
Settings .
The provider settings are displayed.
In order to edit the access data of the mobile
phone network provider you have two options:
R
Option 1: select the predefined access data of
the mobile phone network provider
(
Y page 121).
R
Option 2: manually set the access data of the
mobile phone network provider (
Y page 122).
Canceling Internet access permission
for a mobile phone
X
Call up the device list (Y page 123).
X
To highlight the desired mobile phone in the
device list: turn the controller.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Delete Configuration: turn and
press the controller.
A prompt appears asking whether you wish to
delete the Internet configuration.
X
To select Yes: turn and press the controller.
The Internet access permission for the mobile
phone is now canceled. The mobile phone can
now no longer be used by the system for
Internet functions.
Setting automatic disconnection of
the Internet connection
If a preset time has elapsed during which the
Internet functions have not been used, the Inter-
net automatically disconnects.
X
Call up the device list (Y page 123).
X
To highlight the desired mobile phone in the
device list: turn the controller.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Disconnect Automatically
When Inactive: turn and press the control-
ler.
X
To select 5 Minutes, 10 Minutes or 20
Minutes: turn and press the controller.
Managing all Internet devices
If multiple mobile phones have been enabled for
Internet usage, these can be given priorities.
The system then selects the mobile phone with
the highest priority to establish an Internet con-
nection.
X
Call up the device list (Y page 123).
X
To highlight the mobile phone: turn the con-
troller.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Manage All Internet Devices:
turn and press the controller.
A menu appears.
X
To highlight a mobile telephone: turn the con-
troller.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Change Device Priority: turn
and press the controller.
X
To move the desired mobile phone up or
down: turn and press the controller.
The mobile phone's priority is changed.
The priority of the mobile phones is deter-
mined by the hierarchy. The mobile phone at
the top of the list has the highest priority.
Setting up an Internet connection (Canada)
123
Online and Internet functions
Z
Establishing/ending the connection
Establishing a connection
Read the conditions for establishing a connec-
tion (
Y page 120).
A connection can be established, for example
by:
R
entering a web address (Y page 125)
R
calling up a Mercedes-Benz App
(
Y page 124)
R
calling up a favorite
Ending the connection
X
Press Cancel in the connections window.
Calling up Internet functions
X
To display the main function bar: slide 5 the
controller.
X
To select ®: turn and press the controller.
The menu with the Internet functions is dis-
played.
Connection status
:
Display of existing connection and signal
strength of the mobile phone network
In most cases, the current connection status is
then shown in the status bar when you switch to
another main function.
Detailed connection status
X
Call up Internet functions (Y page 124).
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Settings: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Connection Status: turn and
press the controller.
The following information is displayed:
R
the volume of transferred data
R
connection status
R
the device name of the mobile phone
Ending the connection
USA: you cannot cancel the connection your-
self. The Internet connection is automatically
terminated if the system does not recognize any
user input within a five-minute time period.
Canada:
X
Call up Internet functions (Y page 124).
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select © : turn and press the controller.
If the mobile phone Internet connection is can-
celed, the multimedia system tries to reconnect.
You should therefore always end the connection
in the multimedia system.
Mercedes-Benz Apps
General notes
To be able to use Mercedes-Benz Apps, you have
to register and confirm the terms and condi-
tions.
Calling up Mercedes-Benz Apps
X
Call up Internet functions (Y page 124).
X
To select Mercedes-Benz Apps: turn and
press the controller.
X
To call up the app: turn and press the con-
troller.
You can find further Mercedes-Benz Apps and
information under:
http://apps.mercedes-benz.com/apps/
i
The available features are country-depend-
ent.
License fees may be applicable.
124
Mercedes-Benz Apps
Online and Internet functions
Door-to-door navigation
Mercedes-Benz Companion
The Mercedes-Benz Companion app is available
in the USA.
Mercedes-Benz Companion enables door-to-
door navigation.
Door-to-door navigation means:
R
The current destination is transferred from
the vehicle's multimedia system to an exter-
nal device (mobile phone or smartwatch).
This enables you to continue navigating to a
destination which is in a pedestrian zone, for
example.
R
Conversely, a destination can be selected on
the external device and transferred to the
vehicle's multimedia system.
Other functions:
R
Navigating to the vehicle's location
R
Displaying various information about the vehi-
cle
More information on suitable mobile phones:
http://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect
Further information on Mercedes-Benz Com-
panion (see App Store description).
Web browser
Calling up a website
Function restrictions
Internet pages cannot be shown while the vehi-
cle is in motion.
Entering a web address
X
Call up Internet functions (Y page 124).
X
To select www: turn and press the controller.
An input menu for the web address is dis-
played.
X
Enter characters using the controller or the
number keypad.
X
To finish entry and call up a website: select
¬.
Selecting a web address from the list
X
When the character bar is displayed, slide
5 the controller.
X
To select the desired web address: turn and
press the controller.
The web address can still be changed as
desired.
X
To call up a website: select ¬.
The website is called up.
Navigating the website
Step Result
X
Turn the controller. Navigates from one
selectable item (e.g.
link, text field or
menu) to the next and
highlights the respec-
tive element on the
website.
Sliding the controller:
X
Left or right 1
X
Up or down 4
X
Diagonally 2
Moves the pointer on
the page.
X
Press the control-
ler.
Opens the selected
item.
X
Press %. Calls up the menu.
Web browser
125
Online and Internet functions
Z
Menu functions
:
Closes the browser
;
Goes back/forward
=
Updates/cancels
?
URL entry
A
Favorites
B
Closes the window
C
Options
X
To show the menu: press the % button.
X
To call up the Options menu: select 3 by
turning and pressing the controller.
X
To close the website: select &.
X
To call up the previous website: select
t.
X
To call up the next website: select u.
X
To refresh the website: select Î.
The website is refreshed. This procedure may
take some time.
i
While the website is loading, a cross
appears in the menu. This can be used to can-
cel the loading procedure.
X
To enter a URL: select g.
X
Enter a web address (URL) (Y page 125).
X
Favorites: select f.
X
To close the active window: select h.
Options menu
Opening in a new window
In order to be able to use this function, the cur-
sor must be on a link.
X
To show the menu: press the % button.
X
To select 3: turn and press the controller.
X
Select Open In A New Window.
The website is opened in a new window.
Adding to bookmarks
Adds the current website to the favorites. The
website can then be called up using the menu.
You can store up to 20 favorites in the menu.
X
To show the menu: press the % button.
X
To select 3: turn and press the controller.
X
Select Add to Bookmarks.
The website is added to the bookmarks.
Current URL
X
To show the menu: press the % button.
X
To select 3: turn and press the controller.
X
Select Current URL.
The URL appears.
Zoom
You can use this function to enlarge web pages.
X
To show the menu: press the % button.
X
To select 3: turn and press the controller.
A menu appears. The # dot indicates the cur-
rent setting.
X
Select Zoom.
126
Web browser
Online and Internet functions
X
To navigate on the web page: slide 1,
4 or 2 the controller.
X
To zoom in on the web page: turn the control-
ler.
Jumping from link to link
You can use this function to skip from one link to
the next on a website.
X
To show the menu: press the % button.
X
To select 3: turn and press the controller.
A menu appears. The # dot indicates the cur-
rent setting.
X
Select Jump From Link To Link.
If a website has been called up and the con-
troller is turned, the cursor jumps from link to
link.
Directional scrolling
You can use this function to scroll up and down
on the web page.
X
To show the menu: press the % button.
X
To select 3: turn and press the controller.
A menu appears. The # dot indicates the cur-
rent setting.
X
Select Directional Scrolling.
If a website has been called up and the con-
troller is turned, the cursor moves up or down
depending on the direction of the turn.
Settings
Overview
X
To show the menu: press the % button.
X
To select 3: turn and press the controller.
A menu appears.
X
Select Settings.
You can activate or deactivate the following set-
tings:
R
Download Images Automatically
It may take some time to download the con-
tents of websites that contain a large amount
of images. Therefore, it may be useful to deac-
tivate this option.
R
Block Pop-Ups
Popups are windows (usually with advertise-
ments) which are displayed automatically
when you call up a website. You can block
these displays.
R
Activate Javascript
Javascript makes it possible to display and
interact with dynamic content on the website.
R
Allow Cookies
Some websites save information in small text
files (cookies) on your system. You can deter-
mine whether cookies may be stored.
R
Enable Internet Audio
You can switch the browser's audio playback
on or off here.
R
Hide Scroll Bars
You can show or hide the scroll bar here.
R
Show Link Target
You can display the link's URL here.
R
Character Size
You can select the font size which is used
when displaying the website.
R
Character Code
You can select a different character set here,
e.g. if the characters of a website appear dis-
torted.
Changing settings
X
To select the desired setting: turn and press
the controller.
Switch the setting on O or off ª.
Changing the character size or character
code
X
Select Character Size or Character Code.
X
To select the setting you require: turn and
press the controller.
i
If you change the settings, the websites may
not be displayed correctly.
Web browser
127
Online and Internet functions
Z
Deleting private data
X
Call up Internet functions (Y page 124).
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Settings: slide 6, turn and press
the controller.
A menu appears.
X
To select Delete Private Data: turn and
press the controller.
X
To select the setting you require: turn and
press the controller.
or
X
Select Delete All Data On Exit.
Switch the setting on O or off ª.
Option Function
All
Deletes all personal
data.
Cache
Deletes data in the
cache.
Cookies
Deletes cookies that
are created by web-
sites which you have
called up.
URL History
Deletes all websites
visited (path).
O Delete All
Data On Exit
If this function is acti-
vated O, all personal
data is deleted when
you exit the Internet
browser.
i
If you reset the multimedia system to the
factory settings (reset function), this data and
the settings are deleted (
Y page 43).
Favorites
Introduction
Favorites are frequently visited websites.
Creating favorites
Adding a favorite in the menu
X
Call up Internet functions (Y page 124).
X
Select www.
X
Enter the web address (URL) and name using
the character bar and press ¬.
Adding to favorites
X
To call up the menu: press the % button.
X
To select 3: turn and press the controller.
X
Select Add to Bookmarks (Y page 126).
Selecting favorites
X
Call up Internet functions (Y page 124).
X
To select the Internet Favorites menu:
turn and press the controller.
The Favorites menu appears.
X
Select the desired bookmark.
The favorite is opened in a new window.
Editing favorites
X
Call up Internet functions (Y page 124).
X
To select the Internet Favorites menu:
turn and press the controller.
The Favorites menu appears.
X
To bring the desired favorites to the front.
X
To select Edit: slide 6 and press the con-
troller.
An input menu appears.
X
Enter a web address (URL).
X
Press the touchpad or controller.
X
Select p.
X
Press the touchpad or controller.
X
Slide 6 the controller.
X
Enter a name.
128
Web browser
Online and Internet functions
Deleting favorites
X
Call up Internet functions (Y page 124).
X
To select the Internet Favorites menu:
turn and press the controller.
The Favorites menu appears.
X
Select the desired favorites.
X
Select Delete.
A prompt appears.
X
Select Yes.
The favorite is deleted.
Closing the browser
X
Select % in the browser menu
(
Y page 126)
or
X
Press the % button for longer than two
seconds.
A prompt appears, asking whether you want
to close the Internet browser.
X
Select Yes.
The application is closed.
Web browser
129
Online and Internet functions
Z
Your multimedia system equipment
These operating instructions describe all the
standard and optional equipment of your multi-
media system, as available at the time of going
to press. Country-specific differences are pos-
sible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not
feature all functions described here. This also
applies to safety-relevant systems and func-
tions.
Read the information on qualified specialist
workshops in the vehicle Operator's Manual.
Switching on the radio
X
Press the $ button.
The radio menu appears. You will hear the last
station set on the waveband selected last.
Switching HD Radio on/off
X
In radio mode: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Switch HD Radio on O or off ª.
If HD
Radio is switched off, the system does not
switch to digital radio and it is not possible to
select any sub-channels.
i
HD Radio and the HD, HD Radio, and “Arc
logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity
Digital Corp.
Overview
:
Main function bar
;
Status bar with compass display
=
Main display field with available stations and
relevant information
?
Display of radio station selected
A
Radio menu bar
The following functions are available using
the radio main function bar:
R
HD Radio FM: HD FM radio mode
R
HD Radio AM: HD MW radio mode
R
Sat Radio: satellite radio
R
Radio Station Presets: 100 preset posi-
tions for radio stations
R
Info on Radio: information on radio in the
Digital Operator's Manual
The following functions are available using
the radio menu bar:
R
Options: radio options
R
è: searches for stations by name
R
Preset: station presets menu
R
Band: waveband selection
R
Info: displays additional information about
the current station (radio text)
R
à: sound settings
Setting the waveband
Setting the waveband using the but-
ton
X
Press the $ button.
A menu appears with a selection of HD
Radio FM, HD Radio AM, Sat Radio, Info
on Radio and Radio Station Presets.
X
To select the desired waveband: turn and
press the controller.
130
Setting the waveband
Radio
Setting the waveband using the main
function bar
X
In radio mode: slide 5 the controller.
The radio main function bar and menu bar
appear. Radio
is active.
X
Press the controller.
A menu appears with a selection of HD
Radio FM, HD Radio AM, Sat Radio, Radio
Station Presets and Info on Radio.
X
To select the desired waveband: turn and
press the controller.
Setting the waveband using the menu
bar
X
In radio mode: slide 6 the controller.
The radio menu bar appears.
X
To select Band: turn and press the controller.
A menu appears with a selection of HD
Radio FM, HD Radio AM and Sat Radio.
X
To select the desired waveband: turn and
press the controller.
Station
Selecting a station
Setting a station from the main display
field
All currently available stations are displayed.
X
In radio mode, turn the controller until the
desired station is in the center.
Setting a station from the current sta-
tion list
i
The station list is available in HD FM radio
mode or HD AM radio mode. It includes all
stations that can be received.
X
In radio mode, press the controller.
The station list appears with the stations cur-
rently available.
X
To select the desired station: turn and press
the controller.
Entering the station frequency
X
In radio mode: slide 6 the controller.
The radio menu bar appears.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Direct Entry.
An additional menu appears.
HD FM radio mode:
X
To select the HD FM Frequency option: turn
and press the controller.
X
Enter the frequency of the desired station in
the entry field.
HD MW radio mode:
X
To select the HD AM Frequency option: turn
and press the controller.
X
Enter the frequency of the desired station in
the entry field.
Satellite radio operation
X
To select the SatRadio Channel option: turn
and press the controller.
X
Enter the number of the desired channel in
the entry field.
Station presets:
X
To select the Radio Station Presets
option: turn and press the controller.
X
Enter the station preset of the desired station.
Finding a station
X
In radio mode: slide 6 the controller.
The radio menu bar appears.
X
Select è and enter the first letters of the
required station using the controller.
X
Press OK to confirm.
The multimedia system displays a list of avail-
able stations.
X
To select stations from the list: turn the con-
troller and press to confirm.
Entering a preset
X
In radio mode: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Preset: turn and press the control-
ler.
X
To select Enter Preset: turn and press the
controller.
X
Enter the station preset of the desired station.
Station
131
Radio
Station list
X
In radio mode, press the controller.
The station list appears with the stations cur-
rently available.
Saving a station
Storing current stations
X
In radio mode: slide 6 the controller.
The radio menu bar appears.
X
To select Preset: press the controller.
X
To select the Save Current Station/Chan‐
nel option: turn and press the controller.
X
To select the position of the required preset
entry: turn and press the controller.
The currently set station is stored in the selec-
ted preset position. A tone signals a success-
ful preset entry.
Storing a station using the controller
X
Set the desired station in radio mode.
X
Press and hold the controller until the preset
list appears.
X
To select the preset number: turn and press
the controller.
i
Frequencies have already been stored in the
multimedia system. There are 100 preset
positions available.
Moving highlighted stations
X
In radio mode: slide 6 the controller.
The radio menu bar appears.
X
To select Preset: press the controller.
X
Select Edit Station Preset.
X
To select the required preset entry: turn the
controller.
X
Slide 9 the controller.
An additional menu appears.
X
To select Move Highlighted Station/
Channel: turn and press the controller.
The list of stored stations appears again.
X
To move the highlighted station to the new
position: turn the controller and press to con-
firm.
Deleting highlighted stations
X
In radio mode: slide 6 the controller.
The radio menu bar appears.
X
To select Preset: turn and press the control-
ler.
X
Select Edit Station Preset.
X
To select the required preset entry: turn the
controller.
X
Slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Delete Highlighted Station/
Channel: turn and press the controller.
X
To select Yes: turn and press the controller.
The highlighted station is deleted.
Activating/deactivating the station
presets display
You can use this function to change to the sta-
tion presets display.
Activating
X
In radio mode: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Preset: turn and press the control-
ler.
X
To select Station Preset View: On: turn
and press the controller.
The station preset display appears.
X
To switch between the stored stations: turn
the controller.
Deactivating
X
In radio mode: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Preset: turn and press the control-
ler.
X
To select Station Preset View: Off: turn
and press the controller.
The view of the last heard waveband appears.
Tagging music tracks
If an Apple
®
device is connected, the music
tracks and artist displayed in the radio text can
be stored. You have the option of purchasing
this track using iTunes Store
®
. Not all radio sta-
tions support this function.
132
Tagging music tracks
Radio
X
In radio mode: slide 6 the controller.
The radio menu bar appears.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Tag This Track.
A message appears about storing the track
information.
Displaying station information
X
In radio mode: slide 6 the controller.
The radio menu bar appears.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Switch Show Station Information on O
or off ª.
If the function is activated, the artist, track or
the name of the station will be displayed in the
main display field.
Calling up sound settings
X
In radio mode: slide 6 the controller.
The radio menu bar appears.
X
To select à: turn and press the controller.
The sound menu appears (
Y page 160).
Displaying information
This function is available in HD FM radio and HD
AM radio mode.
Reception is only possible if the radio stations
provide the relevant information.
X
In radio mode: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Info: turn and press the controller.
Information on the currently received pro-
gram is displayed.
If available, you will see:
R
the track that is currently being played
R
the artist of the track that is currently being
played
R
the album name
R
the channel abbreviation
R
the logo of the station or Artist Experience
®
Returning to the radio menu:
X
To select Info: slide 6 and press the con-
troller.
Satellite radio
General notes
The satellite radio mode requires satellite radio
equipment and registration with a satellite radio
provider.
Note that the categories and channels shown in
the illustrations depend on the program content
offered by the provider. The illustrations and
descriptions in these operating instructions may
therefore differ from the channels and catego-
ries offered by the provider.
Satellite radio mode may be temporarily unavail-
able or interrupted for a variety of reasons.
These include environmental or topographical
conditions as well as other factors beyond the
control of Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. This means
operation may not be possible in certain areas.
These include:
R
tunnels
R
parking garages
R
locations inside or next to buildings
R
locations in the vicinity of other structures
Sirius XM
®
Satellite Radio offers more than 140
digital-quality radio channels, providing 100%
commercial-free music, sports, news and enter-
tainment.
Sirius XM
®
Satellite Radio uses a fleet of high-
performance satellites to broadcast around the
clock throughout the USA and Canada.
The satellite radio program is available for a
monthly fee. Details are available from the SIR-
IUS XM
®
Service Center and at
http://www.siriusxm.com (USA) or
http://www.siriusxm.ca (Canada).
Your new Mercedes-Benz vehicle comes with
Sirius XM
®
Satellite Radio pre-installed at the
factory. This service is free for a six-month trial
period. About a month before the trial period
ends, information will be provided on how to
extend this subscription. An acoustic signal
sounds and a message is shown, describing how
the subscription can be extended.
i
Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos
are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. and its
Satellite radio
133
Radio
subsidiaries. All other marks, channel names
and logos are the property of their respective
owners. All rights reserved.
Registering satellite radio
:
Phone number of provider
;
Sirius XM
®
ID of your satellite receiver
X
Switch on satellite radio mode (Y page 134).
The satellite radio menu appears showing the
preview channel. You cannot select any other
stations.
X
Slide 6 the controller.
The radio menu bar appears.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Service: turn and press the con-
troller.
The service information screen appears.
Once the telephone connection has been estab-
lished:
X
Follow the instructions of the service staff.
The activation process may take up to ten
minutes. If the activation is completed suc-
cessfully, the Updating Channels...
mes-
sage appears in the display, followed by the
satellite radio menu.
i
You can also have the satellite service acti-
vated online. To do this, visit
http://www.siriusxm.com (USA) or
http://www.siriusxm.ca (Canada).
i
If registration is not included when purchas-
ing the system, your credit card details will be
required to activate your account.
If the satellite receiver is not installed correctly,
the Device
Unavailable message will appear.
Switching to satellite radio
X
To show the main function bar: slide 5 the
controller.
X
To select Radio: turn and press the controller.
The Radio menu appears. You will hear the
last station set on the waveband selected
last.
X
To select Radio in radio mode: slide 5 and
press the controller.
The menu with the available radio modes
appears.
X
To select Sat Radio: turn and press the con-
troller.
The No
Service message appears if there is no
signal.
Satellite radio overview
:
Main function bar
;
Preset
=
Channel name and channel number
?
Channel information
A
Station presets menu
B
Category list
C
Keyword search
D
Options menu
Channel information ? can be viewed in detail
(
Y page 137).
Selecting a category
Satellite radio channels are sorted into catego-
ries. You can choose between various catego-
ries such as News/Discussions, Sports and
Country (if available). The category list is sorted
alphabetically. The content of the categories is
sorted by channel numbers.
134
Satellite radio
Radio
X
To call up the category list: select Cate‐
gory in the menu bar by turning and pressing
the controller.
The category list appears.
X
To select a category: turn and press the
controller.
The category selected is shown in the display.
You hear the channel last selected for this
category.
The # dot indicates the current setting.
At the beginning of the category list, the All
Channels category appears. This category
enables you to browse all available channels.
Selecting a channel
Channel search
X
When the display/section window is selec-
ted, slide 8 or 9 the controller.
The multimedia system searches in both
directions (ascending and descending) and
stops at the next channel found in the selec-
ted category.
Entering channel numbers directly
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Direct Entry: turn and press the
controller.
An input menu appears.
X
To select a channel number: turn and press
the controller.
X
The multimedia system sets the selected
channel.
i
You can only select currently permitted dig-
its.
Selecting a channel via the satellite
radio station list
You can select the channel using the station list
displaying the artists and tracks that are cur-
rently playing.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Current Station List with
Artist & Title: turn and press the control-
ler.
The channel list appears.
X
Select the desired channel
Keyword search
X
To select the keyword search è in the
menu bar: turn and press the controller.
X
To enter the required search term: turn and
press the controller.
Direct and indirect results are shown.
X
Select the required result.
The relevant channel is played.
Memory functions
Quick save:
X
Set the desired channel in satellite radio
mode.
X
Press and hold the controller until the preset
list appears.
X
To select the preset number: turn and press
the controller.
A tone confirms that the storing process was
successful.
Saving a channel using the edit function:
X
In satellite radio mode, slide 6 the control-
ler.
X
To select Preset: turn and press the control-
ler.
X
To select Edit Station Preset: turn and
press the controller.
The list of saved channels appears.
X
To select the preset: turn the controller and
press for about two seconds.
The newly saved channel overwrites the exist-
ing preset.
i
There are 100 presets available.
Activating/deactivating the station
presets display
You can use this function to change to the sta-
tion presets display.
Satellite radio
135
Radio
Activating
X
In radio mode: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Preset: turn and press the control-
ler.
X
To select Station Preset View: On: turn
and press the controller.
The station preset display appears.
X
To switch between the stored stations: turn
the controller.
Deactivating
X
In radio mode: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Preset: turn and press the control-
ler.
X
To select Station Preset View: Off: turn
and press the controller.
The view of the last heard waveband appears.
Music and sports alerts
General notes
This function makes it possible to store a pro-
gram alert for your favorite artists, tracks or
sporting events.
You can store up to 30 music and sports alerts
(favorites).
Music alerts can only be saved whilst a track is
being played. You can also specify sports alerts
via the menu option. The system then continu-
ously searches through all the channels. If a
match is found with a saved message, you will
be informed. A window appears with the respec-
tive information.
Setting a music alert
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Alert for Artist, Track &
Sports Event: turn and press the controller.
A menu appears.
X
Select Add New Alert.
A window with a prompt appears.
X
Select Artist or Track.
The alert is set for the current artist or track.
The music alert window appears
X
To select Change To or Ignore: turn and
press the controller.
If you select Change To
, the channel is
changed and the favorite artist or track is
played.
If you select Ignore
, the current channel will
continue playing.
Setting a sports alert
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Alert for Artist, Track &
Sports Event: turn and press the controller.
A menu appears.
X
Select Manage Sports Alerts.
A menu appears.
X
Select Select New Alerts.
A menu appears.
X
Select the desired team from a league, e.g.
college, NBA, NHL, NFL or MLB.
The alert function for the sports team is
added.
Editing music and sports alerts
X
To select Alert for Artist, Track &
Sports Event: turn and press the controller.
A menu appears.
X
Select Manage Music Alerts or Manage
Sports Alerts.
A list of set alerts appears.
Tagging music tracks
If the channel supports this function, you are
able to transfer the music track currently playing
to an Apple
®
device. You can then purchase it in
the iTunes
®
store.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Tag This Track: turn and press
the controller.
A message about saving this music track on
the Apple
®
device appears.
136
Satellite radio
Radio
Displaying information
X
To select Info in the radio menu bar: turn and
press the controller.
Information on the currently received pro-
gram is displayed.
If available, you will see:
R
the channel logo
R
the channel abbreviation
R
the artist of the track that is currently being
played
R
the track that is currently being played
X
To return to the radio menu: select Info by
sliding 6 and pressing the controller.
Displaying service information
The satellite radio provider's customer service
center is available by phone at any time to
answer any general questions or questions on
the versions available.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Service: turn and press the con-
troller.
The satellite radio provider's details appear.
X
To return to the main display: press the
% button.
Channel list updates
During reception of a new channel list, the
Updating Channels...
message is shown.
The channel last selected is switched to mute
until the update has been completed. Satellite
radio mode is not available during this process.
Once the update has been completed, the sat-
ellite radio menu appears. If the channel last
selected is available, this channel will be played.
Sound settings
Information on sound settings (Y page 160).
Satellite radio
137
Radio
Your multimedia system equipment
These operating instructions describe all the
standard and optional equipment of your multi-
media system, as available at the time of going
to press. Country-specific differences are pos-
sible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not
feature all functions described here. This also
applies to safety-relevant systems and func-
tions.
Read the information on qualified specialist
workshops in the vehicle Operator's Manual.
Activating media mode
General notes
There are several ways to activate media sour-
ces using the multimedia system. The relevant
sections of the Operator's Manual describe the
simplest way to activate a media source. This
section describes all options for activating
media sources. If you wish to play external
media sources, the associated media menu
must already be turned on.
Connections for external media sour-
ces
The following external media sources can be
used:
R
Apple
®
devices (e.g. iPhone
®
)
R
USB devices (e.g. USB stick, MP3 player)
Two USB ports are located in the stowage
space under the armrest.
R
CD
R
DVD video
R
SD cards
R
Devices with Bluetooth
®
connection
Activating media using the button
X
To call up the media menu: press the Õ
button.
The last media source you have set is dis-
played.
X
Press the Õ button again.
The menu appears with the available media
sources.
X
To select the media source: turn the control-
ler and press to confirm.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the fol-
lowing media sources will be available:
R
Disc
R
Memory Card
R
Media Register
R
Media Interface 1
R
Media Interface 2
R
Bluetooth Audio
If playable music files are found, they will be
played by the multimedia system.
Activating media using the main func-
tion bar
X
To show the main function bar in media mode:
slide 5 the controller.
X
To select Media: press the controller.
A menu appears with the available media
sources.
X
To select the media source: turn the control-
ler and press to confirm.
If the media source contains music or video
files, these will be played. The corresponding
media menu appears.
138
Activating media mode
Media
Activating media using the device list
X
In media mode, slide 6 the controller.
The media menu bar is shown.
X
To select Devices: turn and press the con-
troller.
The available media sources will be shown.
The # dot indicates the current setting.
X
Select the media source.
If the media source contains music or video
files, these will be played. The corresponding
media menu is shown.
Switching on automatically
After inserting a CD or DVD, the corresponding
media mode is automatically switched on by the
multimedia system.
If playable music files are found, they will be
played by the multimedia system.
If a media playback function is already switched
on in the multimedia system, this will be inter-
rupted and the CD or DVD mode menu will
appear. If another function, such as navigation,
is being operated, the media menu does not
change. Only the music from the last inserted
CD or DVD will be played.
Audio/video mode
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
The CD/DVD drive is a class 1 laser product.
If you open the housing of the CD/DVD drive,
there is a risk of exposure to invisible laser
radiation. This laser radiation could damage
your retina. There is a risk of injury.
Never open the housing. Always have main-
tenance and repair work carried out at a quali-
fied specialist workshop.
G
WARNING
If you handle a disc while driving, you may be
distracted from the traffic situation. You could
also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk
of an accident.
Only handle a disc when the vehicle is sta-
tionary.
Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers a
distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) per sec-
ond.
Notes on audio/video mode
Permissible data carriers
R
CD audio, CD-R and CD-RW
R
DVD-R, DVD-V and DVD-RW
R
SD card
R
USB storage device
Permissible file systems
R
ISO 9660/Joliet standard for CDs
R
UDF for video DVDs
R
FAT16, FAT32, exFAT and NTFS for SD card
and USB storage media
Multisession CDs
For multisession CDs, the content of the first
session determines how the multimedia system
processes the CD. The multimedia system plays
only one CD session and gives priority to CD
sessions with audio files.
File structure of a data carrier
When you create a disc with compressed music
files, the tracks can be organized in folders. A
folder may also contain subfolders. The disc
may contain no more than eight directory levels.
Files beyond the eighth level will not be recog-
nized by the system.
i
The multimedia system supports data carri-
ers with up to 50,000 files.
In the case of a data carrier with more than
64 GB of stored data, only files in folders with
the following names are supported: Music,
Pictures, Video.
Track and file names
When you create a disc with compressed music
files, you can assign names to the tracks and
folders.
Audio/video mode
139
Media
Z
If MP3 or WMA files are stored in the root direc-
tory itself, the root directory will also be treated
as a folder.
You should observe the following when assign-
ing track names:
R
track names must have at least one character
R
track names must have an extension of a sup-
ported audio or video format, e.g. mp3, aac or
m4v
R
there must be a dot between the track name
and the extension
Example of a correct track name:
"Track1.mp3".
Permissible formats
The multimedia system supports the following
audio and video formats:
Audio for-
mats
MP3, WMA, CDA, AAC for-
mats (.aac, .mp4, .m4a
and .m4b)
Video for-
mats
DVD-V, MPEG, WMV, M4V,
AVI up to 720p
Copy-protected iTunes
®
music files with
the .m4p file extension are not supported.
Permissible sampling and data rates
The multimedia system supports MP3 and WMA
files of the following type:
Format Data rate
[kbit/s]
Sampling
rates [kHz]
MP3 32-320
(fixed and varia-
ble data rates)
8-48
WMA 5-384
(fixed and varia-
ble data rates)
8-48
The multimedia system does not support WMA
files of the following type:
R
DRM (Digital Rights Management) encrypted
files
R
WMA Pro
R
5.1 surround sound
i
Only use tracks with a data rate of at least
128 kbit/s and a sampling rate of at least
44.1 kHz. Lower rates can cause a noticeable
deterioration in quality. This is especially the
case if you have activated a surround sound
function.
Selecting an active partition (USB mass
storage devices only)
You can select this function for USB storage
devices when the storage device is partitioned.
Up to 9 partitions (primary or logical, FAT, FAT32
and NTFS) are supported.
Selecting an active partition
X
Select a USB storage device (Y page 138).
X
Slide 6 the controller.
The media menu bar is shown.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Select Active Partition.
Notes on copyright
Audio or video files that you create or reproduce
yourself for playback are generally subject to
copyright protection.
In many countries, reproductions, even for pri-
vate use, are not permitted without the prior
consent of the copyright holder.
Make sure that you know about the applicable
copyright regulations and that you comply with
these.
Notes on CDs/DVDs
!
Do not affix stickers or labels to the discs.
They could peel off and damage the drive.
The drive is designed to receive EN
60908 standard discs. Therefore, you can
only use discs with a maximum thickness of
1.3 mm.
If you insert thicker discs, e.g. those that con-
tain data on both sides (DVD on one side and
audio data on the other), they cannot be ejec-
ted and can damage the drive.
Do not use discs with an 8 cm diameter, even
when using an adapter. Only use round discs
with a 12 cm diameter.
Discs with copy protection are not compatible
with the audio CD standard and therefore may
not be able to be played.
140
Audio/video mode
Media
Playback problems may occur when playing
copied discs.
There may be playback problems if you play CDs
that you have copied yourself with a storage
capacity of more than 700 MB.
i
The multimedia system is able to play back
audio CDs in multichannel audio format.
Menu overview
:
Main function bar
;
Media menu bar
=
Track display on the disc
?
Track number and number of tracks in the
track list
A
Artist and album
B
Numerical time display
C
Graphic time display
D
Cover view (if available)
Inserting and removing a disc from
the single CD/DVD drive
Before inserting or removing a CD or DVD,
ensure that the cup holder is empty.
Inserting
X
Press the þ button on the single drive.
If there is a disc already inserted, it will be
ejected.
X
Insert a disc into the disc slot with the printed
side facing up.
The drive closes and the disc is played.
If the CD or DVD is started in media mode, the
corresponding media menu is shown. If the
CD or DVD is started from another application
(e.g. navigation), the display will not change.
i
The drive may not be able to play discs with
copy protection.
Removing
X
Press the þ button.
The drive ejects the disc.
X
Remove the ejected disc from the slot.
If you do not take the disc out of the slot, it is
drawn in again automatically after a short
while.
Inserting and removing an SD card
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
SD cards are small parts. They can be swal-
lowed and cause choking. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Keep the SD card out of the reach of children.
If a SD card is swallowed, seek medical atten-
tion immediately.
!
If you are no longer using the SD card, you
should remove it and store it outside the vehi-
cle. High temperatures can damage the card.
The multimedia system supports the following
memory cards:
R
SD cards (Secure Digital)
R
SDHC cards (Secure Digital High Capacity)
R
SDXC cards (Secure Digital eXtended Capac-
ity)
Inserting an SD card
X
Insert the SD card into the SD card slot until
the SD card engages. The side with the con-
tacts must face down.
X
Select the media source (Y page 138).
If Memory
Card has been selected as a media
source, the medium is played and the files are
loaded in the background. If there are no sup-
ported audio or video files, you will see a mes-
sage to this effect.
Removing an SD card
X
Press the SD card.
The SD card is ejected.
X
Remove the SD card.
Audio/video mode
141
Media
Z
Connecting USB devices
There are two USB ports in the stowage space
under the armrest (
Y page 138).
X
Connect the USB device to the USB port.
If the corresponding media menu is visible,
the medium is played and the files are loaded
in the background. If there are no supported
audio or video files, you will see a message to
this effect.
i
MP3 players must support Media Transfer
Protocol (MTP).
Selecting the playback option
Playing similar tracks
X
In media mode, slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Play More Like This: turn and
press the controller.
The multimedia system automatically creates
and plays a track list with similar tracks. If
there are no similar tracks on the data
medium then the function cannot be selec-
ted.
X
Select the required track.
Selecting Play mode
X
In media mode, slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Playback Mode: turn and press the
controller.
X
Select Normal Track Sequence.
The current track list is played in the order it is
stored on the data medium.
X
Select Random Track List.
The current track list is played in random
order.
X
Select Random Medium.
All tracks on the data medium are played in
random order.
Skipping to time
X
In media mode, slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Skip to Time: turn and press the
controller.
A menu appears.
X
To set the time: turn the controller.
Selecting an active partition
X
In media mode, slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Select Active Partition: turn
and press the controller.
You can select a partition on the USB data
carrier.
Showing track information
X
In media mode, slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To switch Show Track Information on O
or off ª: turn and press the controller.
You display or hide information for Track,
Artist and Album in the main display field.
Saving files to Media Register
i
With the Save Files to Media Register
option, you can transfer supported audio,
image or video files to the multimedia system
hard drive.
X
In media mode, slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select the Save Files to Media Reg‐
ister option: turn and press the controller.
A menu appears (
Y page 146).
Managing Media Register
X
In media mode, slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Delete or rename individual files in the Media
Register (
Y page 147).
142
Audio/video mode
Media
X
Delete all files in the Media Register
(
Y page 147).
X
Call up information on the preset
(
Y page 147).
Pausing/continuing playback
X
To pause playback: in audio or video mode,
slide 6 the controller.
The media menu bar is shown.
X
To select Ë in the media menu bar: turn
and press the controller.
Playback is interrupted. The display changes
to Ì.
X
To continue playback: in audio or video
mode, slide 6 the controller.
The media menu bar is shown.
X
To select Ì in the media menu bar: turn
and press the controller.
Playback is continued from the point of inter-
ruption. The symbol changes to Ë.
Selecting a track
Selecting a track using the current
track list
X
To display the current track list: press the
controller in the media mode menu.
The category list appears.
X
Select Current Tracklist.
X
To select a track: turn the controller and press
to confirm.
Selecting a track by skipping to a track
X
To skip forwards or backwards to a track: in
the media mode menu, turn or briefly slide
9 or 8 the controller.
Entering a track number directly
X
In media mode, slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Track Number:: turn and press the
controller.
A menu appears.
X
Enter the desired track number.
Searching for a track
X
In the media mode menu, slide 6 the con-
troller.
The media menu bar is shown.
X
To select Search: turn and press the control-
ler.
The category list is shown.
X
Select a category, e.g. Genres.
Sub-categories appear with the selection of
the main category (depends on the multime-
dia system default settings and the music
tracks available).
X
Select a sub-category, for example Rock.
If the selected sub-category contains music
tracks, these will be displayed.
Gracenote
®
Media Database
General notes
This function is available in CD mode.
There is a version of Gracenote
®
music recog-
nition technology, Emeryville, California, USA on
the multimedia system hard disk. In media
mode, you will recognize this by the logo in the
bottom right-hand corner of the display.
If the audio CD does not contain any CD text
information, the multimedia system can use the
Gracenote
®
Media Database to identify
unknown audio tracks when in CD mode.
Carrying out an Internet update of met-
adata
The Updating Metadata Via Internet
option allows any missing metadata for an audio
CD (e.g. cover, track, album, artist) to be uploa-
ded retrospectively to the internal Gracenote
®
database.
An Internet connection is required for this
(
Y page 124).
Audio/video mode
143
Media
Z
Selecting Internet update of metadata
X
In media mode, slide 6 the controller.
The media menu bar is shown.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Updating Metadata Via Internet
in the selection list.
A connection with the Gracenote
®
server is
established. The missing data is loaded,
saved and displayed in the main display field.
If there is no data found or there is no Internet
connection, a corresponding error message
will appear.
Switching the Gracenote
®
data display
on/off
X
Activate CD mode (Y page 138).
X
To select Gracenote Media Database: turn
and press the controller.
X
To switch the display off: select None.
In the CD mode menu, Track 1
is shown, for
example, instead of the Gracenote
®
data.
X
To switch on the display: press the controller.
Media search
General notes
The multimedia system plays back files from the
following data media:
R
Disc (audio CD or DVD)
R
Memory card
R
Media Register
R
USB storage device
R
Apple
®
devices (folder, year and photos are
not available)
The categories are displayed according to the
data available.
Starting the media search
X
In the media mode menu, slide 6 the con-
troller.
The media menu bar is shown.
X
To select Search: turn and press the control-
ler.
The category list appears.
Category list
X
In the media mode menu, slide 6 the con-
troller.
The media menu bar is shown.
X
To select Search: turn and press the control-
ler.
The category list is shown.
Depending on the connected media sources and
files, the following categories are listed:
R
Current Tracklist
R
Folder
R
Select By Cover
R
Keyword Search
R
Playlists
R
Artists
R
Albums
R
Track
R
Genres
R
Year
R
Composers
R
Videos
R
Photos
R
Podcasts
R
Audiobooks
i
The categories are available as soon as the
entire media content has been read and ana-
lyzed.
If the same device is reconnected with
unchanged media content, these categories
are available more quickly.
When connecting Apple
®
devices, the cate-
gories “Folder”, “Year” and “Photos” are not
available.
Searching a track using the current
track list
X
Select Current Tracklist from the cate-
gory list (
Y page 144).
The selection list appears.
X
Select the required track.
Searching for a track via a folder
Playable files can be searched for in the active
data medium's directories.
144
Media search
Media
X
To select Folder in the category list
(
Y page 144): turn and press the controller.
The folder list appears.
X
Select the required folder.
The track list appears.
X
Select the required track.
Searching for a track via cover view
X
To select Select By Cover in the category
list (
Y page 144): turn and press the control-
ler.
A menu with cover views appears.
X
Select the required cover.
The track list appears.
X
Select the required track.
Searching for a track via music genre
X
To select Genres in the category list: turn and
press the controller.
The multimedia system searches in all media
sources. A selection list with Genre and media
sources appears.
X
Select the desired music genre.
A selection list with music tracks from the
selected genre appears.
X
Select a music track.
The track is played. The menu for the active
media source is shown.
X
To exit the selection list: press the % but-
ton.
Searching for a track via a keyword
X
To select Keyword Search in the category list
(
Y page 144): turn and press the controller.
The input field appears.
X
To select the required characters: turn and
press the controller for each one (
Y page 30).
Entering just part of the name of a track or
artist is enough. The search result then dis-
plays the entire text.
X
Select ¬.
The search results are displayed.
The numbers behind the results, for example
Tracks
(5/0), mean: 5 results that contain
the exact keyword searched for and 0 results
that are similar.
X
Select one of the results.
Keywords that have already been searched
for are displayed in the "Search history" with-
out having to enter them completely. They
can be accepted directly and displayed in the
search result.
X
Select an entry.
Albums and covers (if available) are shown.
The multimedia system searches in all media
sources.
X
Select an album.
The tracks are listed.
X
Select a track.
The media mode menu appears and playback
begins.
Media Register
General notes
You can store music files, photos or video files in
the Media Register. The memory has a capacity
of 10.8 GB.
i
Keep your original music files, photos and
video files in a secure location. An error in the
multimedia system may result in the loss of
files stored in the Media Register. Mercedes-
Benz is not liable for any loss of data.
Switching on the Media Register
X
In media mode press the Õ button.
A menu appears with the available media
sources.
X
To select Media Register: turn and press
the controller.
Playback begins at the point last listened to.
If there are no files, you will see a message to
this effect.
Further options for switching on:
R
using the main function bar: (Y page 138)
R
using the device list: (Y page 139)
R
using the Õ button: (Y page 138)
Media Register
145
Media
Z
Media Register menu
:
Main function bar
;
Display for the active data medium
=
Media menu bar
?
Track display on the disc
A
Track number and number of tracks in the
track list
B
Numerical time display
C
Graphic time display
D
Cover view (if available)
Copying files to the Media Register
General notes
You can copy photos, music files and videos
from the following data mediums:
R
Disc (CD and DVD)
R
SD card
R
USB storage device
R
MP3
i
Data can only be copied from an MP3 player
if this can be configured as a mass storage
device.
Video files from DVD-V cannot be copied.
While copying, several functions will not be
available. If this is the case, you will see a
message to this effect.
1. Selecting a data medium
X
In media mode: press the Õ button.
A menu appears with the available media
sources.
X
To select the media source: turn the control-
ler and press to confirm.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Save Files to Media Register.
The media list appears. A data medium from
which files can be copied is selected auto-
matically.
i
The Save Files to Media Register
function can be reached from any media
application.
X
Select the displayed data medium.
The data medium is loaded.
If the data medium contains files that can be
copied, a selection menu appears.
2. Selecting files
X
To select All Media Files: turn and press
the controller.
This command copies all files from the selec-
ted data medium. The symbol next to All
Media Files is filled in. All subsequent
entries have a checkmark O beside them.
X
Select a folder.
A checkmark O next to the folder entry high-
lights the selection.
X
To select Continue: turn and press the con-
troller.
The copying menu appears.
3. Starting the copying process
In the example, files are copied from a USB
device to the Media Register.
X
To select Start: press the controller.
i
The selection of a target folder is optional. If
there is no target folder given, the selected
files are saved to the main directory of the
Media Register.
X
To select Target Folder: turn and press the
controller.
X
Select a folder.
X
To select Start: press the controller.
The copying procedure starts and is shown in
the progress bar.
It may take some time for the copying process
to be completed, depending on the amount of
data. If there is not enough memory space, a
message to this effect appears.
Once the copying procedure is complete, you
will hear the first track of the copied album.
146
Media Register
Media
You can now copy more files to the Media
Register.
X
To cancel copying: select Cancel.
Files are stored in the Media Register up until
the point of cancellation.
i
It is possible to change to a different func-
tion (e.g. radio) during the copying procedure.
The copying procedure continues in the back-
ground. While the copying procedure is taking
place, this is shown by a symbol in the status
bar.
Renaming/deleting files
X
In media mode: press the Õ button.
A menu appears with the available media
sources.
X
To select the media source: turn the control-
ler and press to confirm.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Manage Media Register.
X
Select Rename / Delete Files.
The file list is displayed.
X
To highlight the file: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Slide 9 the controller.
You can select between Edit
and Delete.
Renaming a file
X
To select Edit: turn and press the controller.
An input field appears.
X
Rename folder.
X
To save changes with ¬: turn and press
the controller.
Renaming a folder only changes the file name.
Depending on whether or not the Show
Track Information option has been selec-
ted, this change may not be visible in the main
display field.
i
Only folders can be renamed.
Deleting a file
X
To select Delete: turn and press the control-
ler.
Deleting all files
!
In order to prevent malfunctions, do not use
COMAND during this time.
This function deletes all files from the Media
Register.
X
In media mode: press the Õ button.
A menu appears with the available media
sources.
X
To select the media source: turn the control-
ler and press to confirm.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Manage Media Register.
X
Select Delete All Media Files.
A prompt appears.
X
To select Yes: turn and press the controller.
All files are deleted.
Calling up memory space info
X
In media mode: press the Õ button.
A menu appears with the available media
sources.
X
To select the media source: turn the control-
ler and press to confirm.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Manage Media Register.
X
Select Memory Info.
Selecting a playback mode
The following options are available:
R
Normal Track Sequence: the tracks are
played in the normal order (e.g. track 1, 2, 3
etc.).
R
Random Medium: all tracks on the data
medium are played in random order (e.g.
track 3, 8, 5 etc.).
R
Random Track List: the current track list is
played in random order (e.g. 3, 8, 5 etc.).
Media Register
147
Media
Z
X
In media mode: press the Õ button.
A menu appears with the available media
sources.
X
To select the media source: turn the control-
ler and press to confirm.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Playback Mode.
The options list appears. The # dot indicates
the current setting.
X
Select the desired option.
The option is switched on. For all options
except Normal Track Sequence
, you will
see a corresponding icon in the main display.
i
The Normal Track Sequence option is
automatically selected when you change the
disc you are currently listening to or when you
select a different medium. If an option is
selected, it remains selected after the multi-
media system is switched on or off.
Bluetooth
®
audio mode
Requirements
The Bluetooth
®
function must be activated in
the multimedia system (
Y page 40).
Bluetooth
®
audio mode requires a Bluetooth
®
-
capable audio device.
Check your Bluetooth
®
audio device for the fol-
lowing; see the manufacturer's operating
instructions:
R
Bluetooth
®
audio profile
The Bluetooth
®
audio device must support
the A2DP and AVRCP Bluetooth
®
audio pro-
files.
R
Bluetooth
®
visibility
Certain Bluetooth
®
audio devices do not just
require activation of the Bluetooth
®
function.
In addition, your device must be made "visi-
ble" to other devices.
R
Bluetooth
®
device name
This device name is predetermined but can
usually be changed. For a clear selection of
the Bluetooth
®
device, Mercedes-Benz rec-
ommends that you customize the device
name.
i
A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile):
Bluetooth
®
audio profile for audio data trans-
mission
AVRCP (Audio Video Remote Control Profile):
Bluetooth
®
audio profile for audio data play-
back
i
The Bluetooth
®
device must be visible to the
multimedia system for authorization. After
authorization, the multimedia system even
finds the Bluetooth
®
device when it is not
visible.
General notes
Before using your Bluetooth
®
audio device with
the multimedia system for the first time, you will
need to authorize it. When you authorize a new
Bluetooth
®
audio device, it is connected auto-
matically. Connection involves first searching
for a Bluetooth
®
audio device and then author-
izing it. You can authorize up to 15 Bluetooth
®
devices.
i
If you authorize a mobile phone that sup-
ports Bluetooth
®
audio, the A2DP and AVRCP
Bluetooth
®
audio profiles are connected
automatically.
The mobile phone is then entered:
R
in the Bluetooth
®
telephone list
(
Y page 94)
R
in the Bluetooth
®
device list
(
Y page 149)
Mercedes-Benz recommends authorizing a
mobile phone in Bluetooth
®
telephony
(
Y page 94).
148
Bluetooth
®
audio mode
Media
Bluetooth
®
audio menu
:
Audio transmission status (depending on
the Bluetooth
®
audio device, also title name
and artist)
;
Data medium position in the media list
=
Sound settings
?
Connects the device
A
Stops Ë or starts Ì playback
B
Name of the connected Bluetooth
®
audio
device (example)
C
Options menu
The following functions are available via media
menu bar :
R
Options: calls up Bluetooth
®
audio options
R
Stops Ë or starts Ì playback
R
Search: searches for a track (not available on
all connected audio devices)
R
Conn. Device: calls up the device manager
R
à: calls up the sound settings.
X
To show the menu bar: slide 6 the control-
ler.
Switching to Bluetooth
®
audio
X
To call up the media menu: press the Õ
button.
The last media source you have set is dis-
played.
X
To show the main function bar: slide 5 the
controller.
X
To select Media: turn and press the controller.
X
To select Bluetooth Audio: turn and press
the controller.
If the Bluetooth
®
audio device is already
authorized, it is activated by the multimedia
system. The Bluetooth
®
audio menu appears
(
Y page 149). Playback starts.
If you see the No
Bluetooth Audio Device
Connected message, you will need to author-
ize the Bluetooth
®
audio device first
(
Y page 149).
i
If the Bluetooth
®
audio device connected
supports metadata and corresponding data is
available, then the artist, track and album
name can be displayed.
Searching for and authorizing a Blue-
tooth
®
audio device
Searching for a Bluetooth
®
audio device
X
Switch on Bluetooth
®
audio mode
(
Y page 149).
X
Slide 6 the controller.
The media menu bar is shown.
X
To select Connect Device: turn and press
the controller.
X
To select Search for Audio Devices:
press the controller.
A message appears.
X
Select Start Search.
The multimedia system searches for Blue-
tooth
®
audio devices within range and adds
them to the Bluetooth
®
device list.
The duration of the search depends on the
number of Bluetooth
®
audio devices within
range and their characteristics.
:
Bluetooth
®
audio device within range and
already authorized
;
Newly detected mobile phone with Blue-
tooth
®
audio mode in range
The Bluetooth
®
device list displays all author-
ized devices, whether they are within range or
not. After a device search, devices which are
within range but not authorized are also dis-
played.
Bluetooth
®
audio mode
149
Media
Z
If the multimedia system cannot find your Blue-
tooth
®
audio device, external authorization may
follow (
Y page 150).
Authorizing a Bluetooth
®
audio device
X
In the Bluetooth
®
device list, select a Blue-
tooth
®
audio device that has not yet been
authorized: turn and press the controller.
Authorization starts.
Depending on which Bluetooth
®
audio device
is being used, the device can be authorized
either by entering a passkey or by Secure
Simple Pairing. You can find information on
this in the "Authorizing (connecting) a mobile
phone" section (
Y page 94). After successful
authorization, the Bluetooth
®
audio device is
connected and starts playing.
i
With some Bluetooth
®
audio devices, play-
back must initially be started on the device
itself, so that the multimedia system can play
the audio data. For the audio device used, the
output of the audio files has to be specified via
Bluetooth
®
.
i
The Bluetooth
®
audio device must support
Bluetooth
®
version 2.1 for connection via
Secure Simple Pairing. The multimedia sys-
tem creates a six-digit code which is dis-
played simultaneously on both devices that
are to be connected.
For some Bluetooth
®
audio devices, the pair-
ing must also be confirmed within 10 sec-
onds.
External authorization
If the multimedia system does not find your
Bluetooth
®
audio device (Y page 149), this may
be due to particular security settings on your
Bluetooth
®
audio device. In this case, check
whether your Bluetooth
®
audio device can
locate the multimedia system.
The Bluetooth
®
device name of the multimedia
system is MB Bluetooth
.
X
Switch on Bluetooth
®
audio mode
(
Y page 149).
X
Slide 6 the controller.
The media menu bar is shown.
X
To select Connect Device: turn and press
the controller.
X
To select Connect via Audio Device: turn
and press the controller.
X
Start the authorization on your Bluetooth
®
audio device (see the manufacturer's operat-
ing instructions).
After successful authorization, the Blue-
tooth
®
audio device is connected and starts
playing.
i
With some Bluetooth
®
audio devices, play-
back must initially be started on the device
itself, so that the multimedia system can play
the audio data.
Device-specific information on authorizing
and connecting Bluetooth
®
-capable mobile
phones can be found on the Internet at
http://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect.
Displaying details
X
To select a Bluetooth
®
audio device from the
Bluetooth
®
device list: turn the controller
(
Y page 149).
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Details: turn and press the con-
troller.
The following information concerning the
selected mobile phone is shown:
R
Bluetooth
®
name
R
Bluetooth
®
address
R
Availability status (shown after an update)
R
Authorization status
X
To close the detailed display: press the
% button.
Starting/stopping playback
Requirement: the Bluetooth
®
audio menu
(
Y page 149) is shown.
Starting playback
X
To select Ì: turn and press the controller.
Playback starts. Ë is selected.
Stopping playback
X
Select Ë.
A message appears. Ì is selected.
Continuing playback
X
Select Ì.
A message appears. Ë is selected.
150
Bluetooth
®
audio mode
Media
Starting playback if the Bluetooth
®
audio device has been stopped
During the search for mobile phones
(
Y page 94), the connection with the Bluetooth
®
audio device is terminated. The No Bluetooth
Audio Device Connected message appears in
the Bluetooth
®
audio menu (Y page 149). When
the search is finished, the Bluetooth
®
audio
device can be reconnected.
X
To confirm the Connect Last Used Player
message in the Bluetooth
®
audio menu: press
the controller.
Depending on the Bluetooth
®
audio device
used, playback starts immediately or you
must start playback manually.
In this case, you will see the Bluetooth
Audio Device Paused message.
X
To start playback: To select Ì: slide 6
and press the controller.
Playback resumes from the beginning.
Selecting a track
The function is not supported by all Bluetooth
®
audio devices.
Some mobile phones impair function with
regard to the following criteria:
R
the number of tracks that can be selected
R
the time period until the next or previous track
is played
X
Use the multifunction steering wheel to
switch to the media menu in the on-board
computer; see the vehicle Operator's Manual.
X
To skip forward or back to a track: press
the 9 or : button on the multifunction
steering wheel.
X
To rapid scroll: press and hold the 9
or : button on the multifunction steering
wheel until the desired track is reached.
If you press and hold the 9 or : but-
tons, the rapid scrolling speed increases after
a short time.
i
During rapid scrolling, track names are not
displayed but only Track+1, Track+2, etc. (or
Track-1, Track-2, etc.). There are no playback
times shown for tracks that have been played.
This is available as an optional function start-
ing with AVRCP Version 1.3.
Playback options
General notes
If the Bluetooth
®
audio device supports the cor-
responding function, the following options are
available:
R
Normal Track Sequence: the tracks are
played in the normal order (e.g. track 1, 2, 3
etc.).
Audio data playback is determined by the
order in which the tracks are written to the
data medium. Alphabetical order is the most
common. Once all the tracks in a folder have
been played, the tracks in the next folder are
played.
R
Random Track List: the current track list is
played in random order (e.g. 3, 8, 5 etc.).
R
Random Medium: all tracks on the data
medium are played in random order (e.g.
track 3, 8, 5 etc.).
Playback options are optional functions and
are not, or only partially, supported by Blue-
tooth
®
audio devices.
Selecting the playback option
X
In the Bluetooth
®
audio menu, slide 6 the
controller (
Y page 149).
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Playback Mode.
A # dot indicates the current setting.
X
Select the desired option.
Increasing the volume in the multime-
dia system
X
In the Bluetooth
®
audio menu, slide 6 the
controller (
Y page 149).
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Volume: turn and press the control-
ler.
A menu appears. The # dot indicates the cur-
rent setting.
X
Select Standard or Boost .
i
If playback on the Bluetooth
®
audio player is
too quiet, the Boost
function may be used. It
is recommended, however, that you increase
Bluetooth
®
audio mode
151
Media
Z
the volume on the Bluetooth
®
audio device
directly.
Reconnecting a Bluetooth
®
audio
device
General notes
The Bluetooth
®
audio profiles are connected
automatically under the following circumstan-
ces:
R
one of the last two mobile phones to have
been connected has also been used as a Blue-
tooth
®
audio device (if the function is sup-
ported by the mobile phone).
R
the mobile phone is automatically connected.
The Bluetooth
®
audio device is then connec-
ted.
i
For an automatic connection with the mul-
timedia system, the mobile phone must be
within range.
For most Bluetooth
®
audio devices, the "auto-
matic connection" must be activated by tick-
ing a box. Depending on the device used, this
prompt often occurs during authorization (see
the manufacturer's operating instructions).
Connecting Bluetooth
®
audio devices
If the No Bluetooth Audio Device Connec‐
ted message appears, you have two options to
reconnect the Bluetooth
®
audio device.
Option 1:
X
To confirm the Connect Last Used Player
message in the Bluetooth
®
audio menu: press
the controller.
If the multimedia system can locate the Blue-
tooth
®
audio device, it will be connected and
start playing.
Option 2:
X
Slide 6 the controller.
The media menu bar is shown.
X
Select Connect Device.
X
To select a Bluetooth
®
audio device: turn and
press the controller.
If the Bluetooth
®
audio device has been
authorized, playback starts.
Bluetooth
®
audio device and simulta-
neous search for mobile phones
i
When searching for a mobile phone or a new
Bluetooth
®
audio device, the connection to an
already activated Bluetooth
®
audio device is
stopped.
The No
Bluetooth Audio Device Connected
message appears in the Bluetooth
®
audio menu.
De-authorizing (deregistering) a Blue-
tooth
®
audio device
X
To select a Bluetooth
®
audio device from the
Bluetooth
®
device list: turn the controller
(
Y page 149).
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Deauthorize: press the controller.
A prompt appears asking whether you really
wish to de-authorize this device.
X
To select Yes: turn and press the controller.
If you select Yes
, the device will be deleted
from the Bluetooth
®
device list.
i
Before re-authorizing the Bluetooth
®
audio
device, you should also delete the device
name MB Bluetooth
from your Bluetooth
®
audio device's Bluetooth
®
list (see the Blue-
tooth
®
audio device's operating instructions).
Operation with the Media Interface
General notes
Media Interface is a universal interface for the
connection of mobile audio and video devices.
Media Interface in the multimedia system has
two USB connections.
The USB ports are located in the stowage com-
partment under the armrest (
Y page 138).
152
Operation with the Media Interface
Media
Media Interface menu
:
Main function bar
;
Display for the active data medium
=
Media menu bar
?
Track display on the disc
A
Track number and number of tracks in the
track list
B
Numerical time display
C
Graphic time display
D
Cover view (if available)
Switching to Media Interface
X
Connect the data medium to USB port 1 or
USB port 2 (
Y page 142).
X
Select the basic menu for Media Interface 1 or
Media Interface 2 (
Y page 139).
If playable media files are found, they will be
played by the multimedia system.
Supported devices
The following data media can be connected to
the multimedia system via Media Interface:
R
iPod
®
R
iPhone
®
R
MP3
R
USB devices
i
iPod
®
and iPhone
®
are registered trade-
marks of Apple Inc., Cupertino, California,
USA.
For details and a list of supported devices, visit
our website at
http://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect.
Then follow the instructions in the "Media Inter-
face" section.
Or call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) (for the USA) or Customer
Relations at 1-800-387-0100 (for Canada).
Supported data formats
Music MP3, WMA, AAC
Video MPEG, WMV, MOV,
AVI, MP4
Images JPG, JPEG, BMP, PNG
i
Video files from Apple
®
devices cannot be
played.
Selecting a music file
Selecting with the controller
X
To display the current track list: press the
controller in the Media Interface menu.
X
Select Current Tracklist.
The track list for the active data medium
appears.
X
To select a track: turn the controller and press
to confirm.
X
To skip forwards or backwards to a track:
turn the controller in the Media Interface
menu.
The selected track is played.
Fast-forwarding or rewinding a track
X
With the media source active in the Media
Interface menu, slide 8 or 9 the con-
troller and hold it until the desired position
has been reached.
Searching for a track
Overview
The following categories may be listed during
the track search:
R
Current Tracklist
R
Folder
R
Select By Cover
R
Keyword Search
Operation with the Media Interface
153
Media
Z
R
Playlists
R
Artists
R
Albums
R
Track
R
Genres
R
Year
R
Composers
R
Videos
R
Photos
R
Podcasts
R
Audiobooks
i
The functions are available as soon as the
entire media content has been read and ana-
lyzed.
If the same device is reconnected with
unchanged media content, these functions
are available more quickly.
The audio books and podcasts categories are
only available for Apple
®
devices.
When connecting Apple
®
devices, the cate-
gories “Folder”, “Year” and “Photos” are not
available.
Searching for a track
X
In media mode, slide 6 the controller.
The media menu bar is shown.
X
To select Search: turn and press the control-
ler.
The category list appears.
X
To select a category, e.g. Current Track‐
list: turn and press the controller.
A selection list appears.
X
Select the required track.
Using the keyword search
X
To select Keyword Search in the category
list: turn and press the controller.
X
Enter and confirm the characters of the
desired search using the controller
(
Y page 145).
Search results are sorted according to the
available categories, displayed and can then
be selected.
Selecting the playback option
X
In media mode, slide 6 the controller.
The media menu bar is shown.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select the desired playback option: turn
and press the controller.
Additional information on playback options
(
Y page 142).
Selecting video settings
Video files from Apple
®
devices cannot be
played.
If playable video files are found, they will be
played by the multimedia system.
X
To activate full-screen mode: press the con-
troller in the Media Interface menu.
X
To show the video menu: slide 6 the con-
troller in full-screen mode.
The Media Interface menu bar appears.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Video Settings.
X
Change the settings (Y page 156).
Video DVD mode
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
The CD/DVD drive is a class 1 laser product.
If you open the housing of the CD/DVD drive,
there is a risk of exposure to invisible laser
radiation. This laser radiation could damage
your retina. There is a risk of injury.
Never open the housing. Always have main-
tenance and repair work carried out at a quali-
fied specialist workshop.
G
WARNING
If you handle a disc while driving, you may be
distracted from the traffic situation. You could
also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk
of an accident.
154
Video DVD mode
Media
Only handle a disc when the vehicle is sta-
tionary.
Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers a
distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) per sec-
ond.
General notes
Notes on discs
!
Do not affix stickers or labels to the discs.
They could peel off and damage the drive.
The drive is designed to receive EN
60908 standard discs. Therefore, you can
only use discs with a maximum thickness of
1.3 mm.
If you insert thicker discs, e.g. those that con-
tain data on both sides (DVD on one side and
audio data on the other), they cannot be ejec-
ted and can damage the drive.
Do not use discs with an 8 cm diameter, even
when using an adapter. Only use round discs
with a 12 cm diameter.
The variety of data media, burners and burn
software means there is no guarantee that the
system will be able to play discs that you have
copied yourself.
DVD playback conditions
The multimedia system can play back video
DVDs produced according to the following
standards:
R
Region code 1 or region code 0 (no region
code)
R
PAL or NTSC standard
You will generally find the relevant details either
on the DVD itself or on the DVD case.
With DVDs that do not meet the standard
requirements, you may encounter playback
problems.
i Observe the following notes:
R
It is also possible to play video DVDs with a
different region code, provided that they
are produced in accordance with the PAL or
NTSC standard. If you insert a video DVD
with a different region code, a message to
this effect appears.
R
The multimedia system is set to region
code 1 at the factory. This setting can be
changed at a qualified specialist workshop.
The region code can be changed up to five
times.
R
If a DVD cannot be played back according
to national color transfer methods (PAL or
NTSC standards), problems with the image,
sound or playback may occur.
Control options
There are four control menus available in DVD
mode.
Most DVDs have their own control menu. The
DVD is operated directly using the controller or
DVD functions.
Control menu and
function
Operation
R
DVD's control
menu
Selection of title,
scene, language,
subtitles ...
Operation with the
controller
R
Options menu
Selection of bright-
ness, contrast,
color, format
Operation using the
menu bar Options
,
video settings
R
Video menu
Selection of scene,
fast forward or
rewind
In full-screen mode,
slide 6 the control-
ler
R
DVD functions
Selection of title,
scene, language,
subtitles ...
In full-screen mode,
press the controller
Function restrictions
Depending on the DVD, certain functions or
actions may not function at all. The symbol K
appears in the display.
Video DVD mode
155
Media
Z
Switching to DVD mode
X
Insert and eject a disc from the single DVD
drive (
Y page 141).
Further options for switching on:
R
Using the main function bar (Y page 138)
R
Using the device list (Y page 139)
R
Using the Õ button (Y page 138)
Showing the Disc menu
:
Main function bar
;
Main display field
=
Media menu bar
The Disc menu can be shown in the following
situations:
X
To show the DVD menu: press the %
button.
X
To show in the video DVD currently play-
ing: slide 6 the controller.
The video menu appears.
X
Press the controller.
The Disc menu appears.
Switching on DVD full-screen mode
You can change from the Disc menu to full-
screen mode as follows:
X
Slide 5 the controller.
The main function bar and menu bar are hid-
den. A full-screen symbol will be shown.
X
Press the controller.
The full-screen mode appears.
Calling up the options menu
Selecting options
X
In full-screen mode, slide 6 the controller
The video menu appears.
X
Press the controller.
The Disc menu appears.
X
To select Options in the menu bar: turn and
press the controller.
A menu appears.
Skipping to time
X
To select Skip to Time: turn and press the
controller.
A menu appears.
X
To set the time: turn the controller.
X
To hide the menu: press the % button.
Displaying the DVD functions
X
To select DVD Functions: turn and press the
controller.
A menu appears (
Y page 157).
Selecting video settings
Dynamic image enhancement
The dynamic image enhancement function auto-
matically matches brightness, contrast and
color to the film being played.
X
Call up the Options menu (Y page 156).
X
Select Video Settings.
X
To switch Dynamic Image Enhancement on
O or off ª: press the controller.
Manual image enhancement
In order to manually adjust the brightness, con-
trast and color, the dynamic image enhance-
ment function and the automatic daylight
adjustment feature must be switched off.
X
Call up the Options menu (Y page 156).
X
Select Video Settings.
X
To select Brightness , Contrast or
Color
: turn and press the controller.
A sliding menu appears.
X
To select the required value: turn the control-
ler.
X
To exit the sliding menu: slide 8 the con-
troller.
156
Video DVD mode
Media
Setting the picture format
X
Call up the Options menu (Y page 156).
X
Select Video Settings.
The following screen format options are availa-
ble for the DVD currently being played:
R
Auto
R
16:9
R
4:3
R
Zoom
X
To set the picture format: turn and press the
controller.
The dot before the menu entry shows the
selected format.
Showing the DVD's control menu
Most DVDs have their own control menu which
can be operated using the controller.
Showing the DVD's control menu
X
To show DVD functions: in full screen video
mode, press the controller.
The DVD functions menu is shown.
X
To select Menu from the DVD functions menu:
turn and press the controller.
The DVD functions menu is hidden and the
DVD's menu entries (e.g. scenes, language,
trailers) are displayed.
X
To select a menu entry: turn and press the
controller.
Operating the video menu
:
Type of data medium
;
Current title
=
Shows the menu bars of the Disc menu
?
Current scene
A
Track time
Operating the video menu
X
To show the video menu: in full-screen video
mode, slide 6 the controller.
X
To hide the video menu: slide 5 the con-
troller.
X
To select the next or previous scene: turn the
controller clockwise/counter-clockwise.
X
To fast forward or rewind: slide 9 or 8
the controller and hold until the desired posi-
tion has been reached.
X
To show the media main function bar and
menu bars: press the controller in the Video
menu.
The Video menu is hidden and the Disc menu
appears.
DVD functions
Showing/hiding the DVD functions
X
To show DVD functions: in full screen video
mode, press the controller.
The DVD functions menu is shown.
X
To hide DVD functions: select % from the
DVD functions.
X
To show the Disc menu: select ò from the
DVD functions.
Overview of DVD functions
:
Activates DVD control menu
;
Hides DVD functions
=
Showing the Disc menu
?
Confirms entry in control menu
A
Navigates DVD lists
B
Jumps to the start of the scene
C
Displays camera perspectives
D
Shows subtitles
E
Selects language
Video DVD mode
157
Media
Z
F
Stops playback
G
Pauses playback
Using the DVD functions
X
In full-screen mode, press the controller
The DVD functions menu is shown.
It is possible to navigate in the DVD's control
menu when the arrows in the upper menu bar
are activated.
X
To select the XZ¬Y arrow to navigate in the
menu: turn the controller.
The active arrow is highlighted.
X
To select a menu entry: press the controller.
The next menu entry in the direction of the
arrow is highlighted.
X
To call up a highlighted menu entry: turn the
controller until ¬ is highlighted.
X
Press the controller.
The selected DVD scene is played.
X
To hide DVD functions: select & using the
controller.
X
Press the controller.
The DVD functions menu is hidden.
Continuing/stopping playback
Interrupting playback
X
Show the DVD functions (Y page 157).
X
To select É from the DVD functions menu:
turn and press the controller.
The Ë display changes to Ì. Playback
is stopped.
Continuing playback
X
Select Ì.
Playback continues from the point where it
was interrupted.
Stopping playback
X
While playback is interrupted select É
again.
Restarting playback
X
Select Ì.
Playback restarts from the beginning.
Pausing/continuing playback
Pausing playback
X
Show the DVD functions (Y page 157).
X
Select Ë: turn and press the controller.
The Ë display changes to Ì.
Continuing playback
X
Select Ì.
Selecting a scene/chapter
If the film is divided into scenes and chapters,
you can select these directly while the film is
running or you can skip progressively through
them. This is not possible at certain points for
some DVDs (e.g. during the opening credits).
It may also be possible to select the scene and
chapter from the functions stored on the DVD.
X
To skip forward or back: in the video menu,
turn the controller.
The next or previous scene in the film is skip-
ped to.
i
The DVD functions can also be used to make
selections (
Y page 157).
Picture viewer
General notes
If there are pictures on the active data medium,
you can view them on the multimedia system.
The following data media and picture formats
are supported:
R
Data media: Media Register, CD, DVD, USB
devices, SD cards
R
Picture formats: jpeg, jpg, bmp, png
The maximum image resolution is
20 megapixels.
It is not possible to view a picture from the driv-
er's side while the vehicle is in motion.
Displaying pictures
X
In media mode, slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Search: turn and press the control-
ler.
The category list appears.
158
Picture viewer
Media
X
To select Photos: turn and press the control-
ler.
A directory list appears. Folders and picture
files can be shown.
X
Select a folder or picture.
If there is no picture on the data medium, an
empty list is shown.
Searching for pictures on other data media
X
You can search for pictures on other data
media.
In the directory list, slide 8 the controller.
The device list appears.
X
To select a data medium with picture files:
turn the controller and press to confirm.
A directory list appears. Folders and picture
files can be shown.
X
Select a folder or picture.
Starting a slide show
X
While viewing a picture, press the controller.
The image menu appears.
X
To select Start Slideshow: turn and press
the controller.
The slide show starts.
X
To end the slide show: press the controller.
The image menu appears.
X
Select End Slide Show.
Changing the picture view
X
While viewing a picture, press the controller.
The image menu appears.
X
To select Turn Clockwise: turn and press
the controller.
The picture rotates 90 degrees.
X
Select Turn Counterclockwise.
The picture rotates -90 degrees.
X
Select Zoom In.
The size of the picture increases. After you
have zoomed into the picture, you can move
the section of the picture.
X
To move the section of the picture: slide 4
and 1 the controller.
X
To revert to the original size: press the con-
troller.
or
X
Press the % button.
Closing the picture viewer
X
While viewing a picture, press the controller.
X
To select Close Picture Viewer: turn and
press the controller.
The last media mode selected is called up.
Picture viewer
159
Media
Z
Your multimedia system equipment
These operating instructions describe all the
standard and optional equipment of your multi-
media system, as available at the time of going
to press. Country-specific differences are pos-
sible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not
feature all functions described here. This also
applies to safety-relevant systems and func-
tions.
Read the information on qualified specialist
workshops in the vehicle Operator's Manual.
Sound settings
Calling up the sound menu
You can make various sound settings for the
different audio and video sources. It is possible
to set more bass for radio mode than for CD
mode, for example. The respective sound menu
can be called up from the menu of the desired
mode.
X
Switch to radio mode (Y page 130).
or
X
Switch to media mode (Y page 138).
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select à: turn and press the controller.
The menu appears with the last setting
accessed, e.g. Equalizer
.
Sound menu overview
Function Options
Equalizer Sets treble, mid-
range and bass
Balance/fader Moves the sound
focus: left/right and
front/rear
Setting treble, mid-range and bass
X
Call up the sound menu (Y page 160).
X
Turn the controller until Equalizer is brought
to the front.
X
To activate rotary menus for treble, mid-range
and bass: slide 6 the controller.
X
To switch between the rotary menus: slide
8 or 9 the controller.
X
To make the desired settings: turn the con-
troller.
Rotary menus show the set values.
X
To return to the sound menu: slide 5 the
controller.
X
To return to media mode: press the % but-
ton.
Adjusting the balance/fader
Balance moves the focus of the sound between
left and right.
Fader moves the focus of the sound between
front and rear.
X
Call up the sound menu (Y page 160).
X
Turn the controller until Balance/Fader is
brought to the front and then slide 6 the
controller.
X
To activate the menu for balance and fader:
press the controller.
X
To adjust the balance: slide 8 or 9 the
controller.
X
To adjust the fader: slide 6 or 5 the con-
troller.
An image shows the sound focus set.
X
To return to the sound menu: press the %
button.
X
To return to media mode: press the % but-
ton.
Burmester
®
surround sound system
General notes
The Burmester
®
surround sound system is avail-
able for all functions in the radio and media
modes.
For the best sound, we recommend that the
Automatic Volume Adjustment
function is
deactivated (
Y page 40). For further information
on automatic volume adjustment, see
(
Y page 40).
If using Bluetooth
®
audio mode, we recommend
you select the Boost
setting (Y page 151).
Calling up the sound menu
You can make various sound settings for the
different audio and video sources. It is possible
160
Burmester
®
surround sound system
Sound
to set more bass for radio mode than for CD
mode, for example. The respective sound menu
is called up from the menu of the desired mode.
X
Switch to radio mode (Y page 130).
or
X
Switch to media mode (Y page 138).
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select à: turn and press the controller.
The menu appears with the last setting
accessed, e.g. Equalizer
.
Overview of Burmester
®
surround sound sys-
tem
Function Options
Equalizer Sets treble, mid-
range and bass
Balance/fader Moves the sound
focus: left/right and
front/rear
Surround Optimizes sound
playback for all seats
Setting treble, mid-range and bass
X
Call up the sound menu (Y page 160).
X
Turn the controller until Equalizer is in the
center.
X
Slide 6 the controller.
The rotary menus for treble, mid-range and
bass are activated.
X
To switch between the rotary menus: slide
8 or 9 the controller.
X
To make the desired Equalizer settings: turn
the controller.
The rotary menus show the set values.
X
To return to the sound menu: slide 5 the
controller.
X
To return to media mode: press the % but-
ton.
Adjusting the balance/fader
Balance moves the focus of the sound between
left and right.
Fader moves the focus of the sound between
front and rear.
X
Call up the sound menu (Y page 160).
X
Turn the controller until Balance/Fader is
brought to the front and then slide 6 the
controller.
X
To activate the menu for balance and fader:
press the controller.
X
To adjust the balance focus: slide 8 or
9 the controller.
X
To adjust the fader focus: slide 6 or 5 the
controller.
An image shows the sound focus set.
X
To return to the sound menu: press the %
button.
X
To return to media mode: press the % but-
ton.
Setting surround sound
The Surround setting enables a wide-ranging
sound playback.
Activating/deactivating
X
Call up the sound menu (Y page 160).
X
Turn the controller until Surround is in the
center.
X
Slide 6 the controller.
The left-hand rotary menu to switch surround
sound on and off is activated.
X
To switch on Surround: turn the controller.
Setting the focus
X
Slide 9 the controller.
The right-hand rotary menu is activated.
X
To set the focus: turn the controller.
The menu symbol, text and image show the
selected setting.
i
The focus can be set regardless of whether
or not surround sound is activated.
X
To exit the menu: press the % button.
Burmester
®
surround sound system
161
Sound
Your multimedia system equipment
These operating instructions describe all the
standard and optional equipment of your multi-
media system, as available at the time of going
to press. Country-specific differences are pos-
sible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not
feature all functions described here. This also
applies to safety-relevant systems and func-
tions.
Read the information on qualified specialist
workshops in the vehicle Operator's Manual.
Weather forecasts
Introduction
This function is currently not available for Can-
ada.
For the reception of weather forecasts via sat-
ellite radio, you will need a SIRIUS XM Satellite
Weather subscription.
If the message appears along with the SIRIUS
telephone number and SIRIUS equipment ID
number, you will need to have the weather ser-
vice activated first.
X
To select Call or Cancel: turn and press the
controller.
If a mobile phone is connected to the multi-
media system (
Y page 92), when you select
Call
a call is placed to a member of the SIR-
IUS service staff. The ID number of the SIRIUS
device will be transferred to the telephone
display.
X
This will be followed by instructions from the
service employee.
Weather forecasts can be received via the sat-
ellite radio for the USA (including Alaska and
Hawaii).
The received weather data can be displayed as
an information chart (daily forecast, five-day
forecast, detailed information) or on the
weather map.
The weather data received from the weather
station is stored for one hour in the multimedia
system. It can therefore be displayed again
immediately after restarting the engine (for
example after refueling).
Depending on which scale has been selected,
the weather map can display the following
weather data with symbols:
R
rain radar
R
storm characteristics
R
high and low-pressure areas, weather fronts
R
course of tropical cyclones (hurricanes,
typhoons)
R
storm warnings
R
wind direction and speeds
i
The rain radar cannot be displayed for
Alaska, Hawaii and Puerto Rico.
i
Hurricane: term used to describe the tropi-
cal cyclones that primarily develop in the
At
lantic, No
rth Pacific and South Pacific
oceans. A wind speeds are above 74 mph
(118 km/h). Five categories are used to clas-
sify the strength of a hurricane.
Typhoon: term used to describe a tropical
cyclone that develops in the northwestern
Pacific. The wind speeds are in the category of
a hurricane.
Switching the SIRIUS Weather display
on/off
Activating
X
Press the % button.
X
To display the main function bar: slide 5
the controller.
X
To select ®: turn and press the controller.
The online applications menu appears.
X
To select SIRIUS Weather: turn and press
the controller.
The information chart shows the daily fore-
cast at the current vehicle position.
162
Weather forecasts
SIRIUS Weather
You see the following information:
R
the date and time of the weather message
received last
R
information on the current weather (temper-
ature, cloud coverage) and a forecast for the
next three, six and twelve hours
R
the current highest temperature and fore-
casts
R
the current lowest temperature and forecasts
R
the probability of rain
Switching to the 5-day forecast:
X
To select Current: turn and press the con-
troller.
A menu appears.
X
Select 5-Day.
The information chart displays the forecast
for the next five days in the currently selected
location.
Returning to the current-day forecast:
X
To select 5-Day: turn and press the controller.
A menu appears.
X
Select Current.
The information chart shows the forecast for
the current day again.
Deactivating
X
Press %.
Displaying detailed information
Besides the current temperatures, you can dis-
play information such as wind speeds and UV
index.
X
To select Current or 5-Day in the current-day
or 5-day forecast: turn and press the control-
ler.
A menu appears.
X
Select Info.
The information chart shows detailed infor-
mation for the selected area.
Selecting the area for the weather
forecast
Introduction
You can select the weather forecasts for:
R
the current vehicle position
R
the vicinity of the destination
R
a winter sports area
R
an area within the USA
You can select a location in the information
chart (option 1) or in the map (option 2). You can
store frequently selected locations in the mem-
ory (
Y page 165).
i
The data for the weather forecasts is
received from the weather station nearest to
the selected location.
Weather forecasts
163
SIRIUS Weather
Option 1: selecting the area in the infor-
mation chart
X
To select Town in the information chart: turn
and press the controller.
X
To select the current vehicle position:
select Current Position
from the menu.
The weather data for the current vehicle posi-
tion is received from the nearest weather sta-
tion and automatically displayed.
Requirement for "Near destination": a route to a
destination has been calculated (
Y page 59).
The menu item is otherwise grayed out.
X
To select the vicinity of the destination:
select Near Destination
from the menu:
turn the controller and press to confirm.
X
To select a winter sports area: select At
Ski Area from the menu: turn the controller
and press to confirm.
X
Select a state, e.g. Colorado.
X
Select a winter sports area from the menu.
The weather data and other information is
displayed for the winter sports area that has
been selected. The data is supplied by the
nearest weather station.
The information chart shows the following infor-
mation (if available):
R
ski slopes/ski lifts
R
snowboarding and nighttime opening
R
snow conditions (e.g. snow depth)
R
temperature
The status of a facility is indicated as follows:
R
green check mark - open
R
red cross - closed
R
question mark - not known
Example: city list with character bar
Entry limitation: searching for a location using
the character bar is not possible while driving.
X
To search for a location: select Search
Areas: turn and press the controller.
X
Select Other States or Current State
(ABC).
Depending on the selection, the list of states
or cities will appear with the character bar.
You can limit the search using the character
bar.
X
To select state/province or city: enter the
first few letters by turning and pressing the
controller.
X
To switch to the list without the character bar:
slide 5 the controller or select ¬.
X
To cancel an entry: highlight % in the char-
acter bar and press the controller.
Pressing briefly deletes the last letter
entered.
Pressing and holding longer deletes the entire
entry.
X
To select the state/province or city from the
list: turn and press the controller.
After selecting a state (or province) the list of
locations appears.
After selecting a location, the information
chart displays the weather forecast for the
164
Weather forecasts
SIRIUS Weather
selected location. The data is supplied by the
nearest weather station.
Option 2: selecting the area in the
weather map
X
Call up the weather map (Y page 165).
X
Move the weather map so that the crosshair is
over the desired area (
Y page 165).
X
Press the controller.
The information chart shows the weather
forecast for the selected area. The data is
supplied by the nearest weather station.
Memory functions
Storing the area in the weather memory
You can save locations that are called up fre-
quently in ten preset positions (0, 1-9) in the
weather memory.
X
In the weather memory: select the area for
the weather forecast (
Y page 163).
The selected location appears at the top in the
status bar.
X
To select Town in the information chart: turn
and press the controller.
X
Select Presets.
X
Select a preset using the controller.
X
Press and hold the controller until you hear a
tone.
The area is entered on the selected preset.
Selecting an area from the weather
memory
X
Directly from the weather memory: select
Town
from the information chart: turn and
press the controller.
X
Select Presets.
X
Select the memory position which contains
the location you require.
The weather data for the selected area is dis-
played.
Weather map
Calling up the weather map
X
To select Map in the information chart: turn
and press the controller.
The weather map is shown on a 500-mi (500-
km) scale. The crosshair highlights the
weather station that supplies the current
weather data.
Moving the weather map
X
Slide 4 or 1 the controller.
The weather map moves in the corresponding
direction under the crosshair.
Changing the scale
X
Turn the controller.
The scale bar appears.
X
Turn until the desired scale is set.
Showing/hiding the menu in the
weather map
X
To show: press the controller.
X
To hide: slide 5 the controller.
Selecting a weather station in the map
X
Move the weather map and crosshair to the
desired position (
Y page 165).
X
To show the menu: press the controller.
X
To select Weather Table: press the control-
ler.
The weather data for the selected position is
received from the nearest weather station
and automatically displayed as a current-day
forecast.
Weather forecasts
165
SIRIUS Weather
Switching layers on the map on/off
You can switch on different layers, for example
to display the rain radar, weather fronts and the
course of tropical storms on the map.
X
Display the menu on the weather map
(
Y page 165).
X
To select View: turn and press the controller.
X
Select a layer.
Switch the display on O or off ª.
Explanation of the layers on the
weather map
R
Menu item Radar Map
Displays the rain radar as a colored area in all
map scales. For an explanation of the colors,
see the legend (
Y page 168).
R
Menu item Storm Characteristics
Displays the characteristics of a storm in all
map scales:
-
tornadic storm:
storm cell with strong winds (super cell),
from which a tornado can develop. Torna-
does are also known as twisters.
-
cyclone:
storm cells from which a tornadic storm
can develop
-
hailstorm
-
the likelihood of a hailstorm
R
Storm watch areas
Shows areas for which storm advisories have
been issued (red areas). It is shown in map
scales 50 mi (50 km), 200 mi (200 km) and
500 mi (500 km).
R
Menu item Atmospheric Pressure
Shows the position of high and low-pressure
areas (H, L), weather fronts and isobars It is
shown in map scales 200 mi (200 km) and
500 mi (500 km).
R
Menu item Tropical Storm Tracking
Shows the direction and speed of propagation
(track) of a tropical storm in all map scales
with information on times and intensity.
R
Menu item Winds
shows the wind direction and wind speed in
map scale of 5 mi (5 km).
Sample displays of weather data in the
map
Displaying the rain radar:
X
Activate the Radar Map display level
(
Y page 166).
The rain radar image is then displayed if
weather data is available.
i
You can call up the legend for the precipita-
tion radar (
Y page 168).
The transparency of the precipitation radar
map display level can be adjusted in five
stages.
Displaying storm characteristics:
X
Activate the Storm Characteristics dis-
play level (
Y page 166).
If weather data is available, the weather map
will then display the storm characteristics.
You can call up the legend for storms
(
Y page 168).
The following information on a storm cell is
displayed (if available):
R
characteristics of the storm cell
R
date and time of observation (time stamp)
R
directional movement speed and path
Propagation speed: the speed at which the
storm cell is advancing.
166
Weather forecasts
SIRIUS Weather
Displaying weather fronts:
X
Activate the Atmospheric Pressure display
level (
Y page 166).
If weather data is available, the weather map
will then display the weather fronts.
The example shows the position of high and
low-pressure areas (H, L), weather fronts and
isobars. Isobars are lines that show where the
air pressure is the same.
Legend: weather fronts
Weather
front
Explanation
Cold front
(blue line with
blue triangles)
If a cold front moves in, the
weather remains changeable
and there are often rain
showers and thunderstorms.
The air temperature decrea-
ses.
Warm front
(red line with
red semi-cir-
cles)
A warm front may cause
more prolonged steady rain,
more cloud cover and a slow
rise in temperature.
Stationary
front
(red and blue
line with red
semi-circles
and blue trian-
gles)
The weather front moves
minimally. The weather
remains changeable in this
area.
Occlusion
(purple line
with purple
semi-circles
and triangles)
When the faster cold front
catches up and joins the
warm front ahead of it, an
occluded front is formed. The
weather remains changeable
and rainy within an occlu-
sion.
Displaying storm tracking information:
X
Activate the Tropical Storm Tracking dis-
play level (
Y page 166).
If weather data is available, the weather map
will then display storm tracking information.
Example: in the middle of the map you can see
the current position of the tropical low-pres-
sure area (cyclone). To the right of this a solid
line shows the previous path with positions
and times. The forecast for the direction of
propagation is shown by a dotted line with
positions and times.
You can find out detailed information on a
cyclone in the Storm Guide (
Y page 169).
A tropical storm is separated into different cat-
egories according to the location at which it
develops.
Region of origin category
Atlantic, North
and South Pacific
Oceans
Name of tropical low-
pressure system (Trop‐
ical Low Press.
Sys.)
Atlantic, North
and South Pacific
Oceans
Name of tropical storm
(Tropical Storm)
Weather forecasts
167
SIRIUS Weather
Region of origin category
Atlantic, North
and South Pacific
Oceans
Name of tropical storm
(Hurricane Category
3)
Displays hurricane cate-
gories 1 through 5
Northwestern
Pacific Ocean
Name of tropical storm
(Tropical Low
Press. Sys.)
Northwestern
Pacific Ocean
Name of tropical storm
(Tropical Cyclone)
Northwestern
Pacific Ocean
Name of tropical storm
(Typhoon)
Northwestern
Pacific Ocean
Name of tropical storm
(Super-Typhoon)
If you have selected a map scale of 50 mi
(50 km) or smaller you will also see the time
stamp for the current weather data.
The weather map shows wind directions and
wind speeds.
Legend (precipitation radar and storms)
X
Display the menu on the weather map
(
Y page 165).
X
To select View: turn and press the controller.
X
Select Legend.
i
The symbol for a tornadic storm is also valid
for a cyclone (mesocyclone).
Precipita-
tion type
Color scale
Rain Eleven shades from light to
heavy (light green to red) indi-
cate the characteristics
Mixed Shades from light to heavy
(light purple to purple) indicate
the characteristics
Snow Shades from light to heavy
(light turquoise to turquoise)
indicate the characteristics
Time stamp
The time stamp shows when the weather data
was created by the weather station.
A time stamp corresponds to the time at the
vehicle's current position. The changeover from
summer time to standard time is performed
automatically.
X
Display the menu on the weather map
(
Y page 165).
X
To select View: turn and press the controller.
X
Select Time Stamp.
Changing to the information chart
X
Display the menu on the weather map
(
Y page 165).
X
To select Weather Table: turn and press the
controller.
Storm watch areas
Storm watch areas for which there are storm
advisories are displayed as red areas on the
weather map.
168
Weather forecasts
SIRIUS Weather
Activating/deactivating the display of areas in
red:
X
Display the menu on the weather map
(
Y page 165).
X
To select View: turn and press the controller.
The list of display levels appears.
X
Select Storm Watch.
X
Select Show Symbols for Storm Areas
On Map.
Depending on the previous setting, activate
O or deactivate ª the display of areas in
red.
Activating/deactivating the automatic display
of warning popups:
X
Select Display Storm Watch Automati‐
cally.
Depending on the previous setting, activate
O or deactivate ª the automatic display of
warning popups.
Setting the radius for the popups:
X
Select 5 Miles (5 km), 50 Miles (50 km) or
200 Miles
(200 km).
Storm overview
Displaying the Storm Guide:
X
Display the menu on the weather map
(
Y page 165).
X
To select Guide: turn and press the controller.
A menu appears. The current storm is high-
lighted. There is information about the storm
in the status bar.
X
To select Next: turn and press the controller.
The next storm is marked.
X
Select Previous.
The previous storm is highlighted.
Showing storm details:
X
Select Details.
You see detailed information about the selec-
ted storm.
Showing detailed information (if available):
R
name of the tropical storm and category
R
time stamp
R
directional movement speed and path
Propagation speed: the speed at which the
storm cell of a tropical cyclone is advanc-
ing.
R
maximum wind speed
Weather forecasts
169
SIRIUS Weather
170
171
172
4

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Mercedes C-Class Cabriolet 2018 bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Mercedes C-Class Cabriolet 2018 in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 4,3 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Andere handleiding(en) van Mercedes C-Class Cabriolet 2018

Mercedes C-Class Cabriolet 2018 Gebruiksaanwijzing - English - 350 pagina's


Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info